Ansys Basic

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 747

Introduction to ANSYS 10.

0
Part 1
Training Manual
Introduction to ANSYS 10.0 - Part 1 - Training Manual
Table of Contents Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
1. Introduction 1-1 5. Preliminary Decisions 5-1
A. Which Analysis Type? 5-3
2. FEA and ANSYS 2-1 B. What to Model? 5-9
A. What is FEA? 2-3 C. Which Element Type? 5-20
B. About ANSYS 2-6
C. About the Company 2-20 6. Thermal Analysis 6-1
A. Overview 6-3
3. ANSYS Basics 3-1 B. Procedure 6-5
A. Starting ANSYS 3-3 C. Workshop 6-16
B. The GUI 3-8
C. Graphics & Picking 3-16 7. Thermal-Stress Analysis 7-1
D. On-Line Help 3-25 A. Overview 7-3

TO ANSYS
E. The Database and Files 3-33 B. Procedure 7-4
F. Exiting ANSYS 3-42 C. Workshop 7-8

ANSYS 5.6
G. Workshop 3-43
8. Importing Geometry 8-1
4. Stress Analysis 4-1 A. IGES Imports 8-3
A. Analysis Steps 4-4 B. Connection Products 8-9
B. Geometry 4-7 C. F.E. Model Imports 8-15
C. Meshing 4-15 D. Workshop 8-16

5.6 -- Part
D. Loading 4-32
E. Solve 4-44 9. Solid Modeling 9-1
F. Reviewing Results 4-49 A. Definitions 9-4
G. Checking Validity of Solution 4-57

Part 1
B. Top-Down Modeling 9-7
H. Workshop 4-61 C. Workshop 9-29
D. Bottom-Up Modeling 9-30
E. Workshop 9-50

1
001289
30 Nov 1999
2
Introduction to ANSYS 10.0 - Part 1 - Training Manual
...Table of Contents Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
10. Meshing 10-1 14. Postprocessing 14-1
A. Multiple Element Attributes 10-3 A. Query Picking 14-3
B. Controlling Mesh Density 10-10 B. Results Coordinate System 14-6
C. Changing a Mesh 10-20 C. Path Operations 14-9
D. Mapped Meshing 10-23 D. Error Estimation 14-16
E. Hex-to-Tet Meshing 10-40 E. Load Case Combinations 14-25
F. Mesh Extrusion 10-48 F. Workshop 14-31
G. Sweep Meshing 10-53
H. Workshop 10-59 15. Short Topics 15-1
A. Toolbar & Abbreviations 15-3
11. Select Logic 11-1 B. Start File 15-9
A. How to Use Select Logic 11-4 C. Input Files 15-10

TO ANSYS
B. Components & Assemblies 11-10 D. Batch Mode 15-15
C. Workshop 11-15 E. Workshop 15-17

ANSYS 5.6
12. APDL Basics 12-1 16. Mechanical Toolbar 16-1
A. Defining Parameters 12-4 A. A Quick Tour 16-4
B. Using Parameters 12-8 B. Workshop 16-13
C. Retrieving Database Information 12-11
D. Workshop 12-16

5.6 -- Part
13. Loading and Solution 13-1
A. Force Loads 13-4
B. Nodal Coordinate System 13-8

Part 1
C. Solvers 13-13
D. Multiple Load Steps 13-20
E. Workshop 13-28

1
001289
30 Nov 1999
3
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS
ANSYS 5.6 Part 1
5.6 -- Part 1
Training Manual

1. Introduction
Introduction
Welcome! Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Welcome to the Introduction to ANSYS Training Course!
• This training course covers the basics of how to use ANSYS
for static or steady-state analyses.
• It is intended for all new or occasional ANSYS users
regardless of actual ANSYS application.

TO ANSYS
• Several advanced training courses are available on specific
topics. See the training course schedule on the ANSYS

ANSYS 5.6
homepage: www.ansys.com under “Services”.

5.6 -- Part
Part 1
1
001289
30 Nov 1999
1-2
Introduction
Course Objectives Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
To teach the basics of ANSYS in the following areas:
• ANSYS capabilities, basic ANSYS terminology, and the
ANSYS GUI
• How to perform a complete ANSYS analysis… the basic steps
involved

TO ANSYS
• Building or importing solid models and meshing

ANSYS 5.6
• Applying loads, solving, and reviewing results
• Productivity enhancement tools -- select logic, APDL, batch
mode, Mechanical Toolbar, etc.

5.6 -- Part
Part 1
1
001289
30 Nov 1999
1-3
Introduction
Topics Covered Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
2. FEA and ANSYS 8. Importing Geometry
3. ANSYS Basics 9. Solid Modeling
4. Stress Analysis 10. Meshing
5. Preliminary Decisions 11. Select Logic
6. Thermal Analysis 12. APDL Basics

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 5.6
7. Thermal-Stress Analysis 13. Loading & Solution
14. Postprocessing

5.6 -- Part
15. Short Topics
16. The Mechanical Toolbar

Part 1
1
001289
30 Nov 1999
1-5
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS
ANSYS 5.6 Part 1
5.6 -- Part 1
Training Manual

2. FEA and ANSYS


FEA and ANSYS
Overview Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• In this chapter, we will define Finite Element Analysis and
also give you an idea of ANSYS capabilities.
• Topics covered:
A. What is FEA?
B. About ANSYS
C. About the company

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 5.6
5.6 -- Part
Part 1
1
001289
30 Nov 1999
2-2
FEA and ANSYS
A. What is FEA? Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Finite Element Analysis is a way to simulate loading
conditions on a design and determine the design’s response
to those conditions.
• The design is modeled using discrete building blocks called
elements.
– Each element has exact
Historical Note

TO ANSYS
equations that describe how it
responds to a certain load. • The finite element method of

ANSYS 5.6
structural analysis was created by
– The “sum” of the response of all academic and industrial researchers
elements in the model gives the during the 1950s and 1960s.
• The underlying theory is over 100
total response of the design.

5.6 -- Part
years old, and was the basis for
– The elements have a finite pen-and-paper calculations in the
evaluation of suspension bridges
number of unknowns, hence the

Part 1
and steam boilers.
name finite elements.

1
001289
30 Nov 1999
2-3
FEA and ANSYS
...What is FEA? Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• The finite element model, which has a finite number of
unknowns, can only approximate the response of the
physical system, which has infinite unknowns.
– So the question arises: How good is the approximation?
– Unfortunately, there is no easy
answer to this question. It
depends entirely on what you are

TO ANSYS
simulating and the tools you use

ANSYS 5.6
for the simulation. We will,
however, attempt to give you
guidelines throughout this
training course.

5.6 -- Part
Part 1
Physical System F.E. Model

1
001289
30 Nov 1999
2-4
FEA and ANSYS
...What is FEA? Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Why is FEA needed?
• To reduce the amount of prototype testing
– Computer simulation allows multiple “what-if” scenarios to be
tested quickly and effectively.

• To simulate designs that are not suitable for prototype testing

TO ANSYS
– Example: Surgical implants, such as an artificial knee

ANSYS 5.6
• The bottom line:
– Cost savings
– Time savings… reduce time to market!

5.6 -- Part
– Create more reliable, better-quality designs

Part 1
1
001289
30 Nov 1999
2-5
FEA and ANSYS
B. About ANSYS Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• ANSYS is a complete FEA software package used by
engineers worldwide in virtually all fields of engineering:
– Structural
– Thermal
– Fluid, including CFD (Computational Fluid Dynamics)
– Electrical / Electrostatics

TO ANSYS
– Electromagnetics

ANSYS 5.6
• A partial list of industries in which ANSYS is used:
– Aerospace – Electronics & Appliances

5.6 -- Part
– Automotive – Heavy Equipment & Machinery
– Biomedical – MEMS - Micro Electromechanical

Part 1
– Bridges & Buildings Systems
– Sporting Goods

1
001289
30 Nov 1999
2-6
FEA and ANSYS
…About ANSYS Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• ANSYS/Multiphysics is the flagship ANSYS product which
includes all capabilities in all engineering disciplines.
• There are three main component products derived from
ANSYS/Multiphysics:
– ANSYS/Mechanical - structural & thermal capabilities
– ANSYS/Emag - electromagnetics

TO ANSYS
– ANSYS/FLOTRAN - CFD capabilities

ANSYS 5.6
• Other product lines:
– ANSYS/LS-DYNA - for highly nonlinear structural problems

5.6 -- Part
– DesignSpace - an easy-to-use design and analysis tool meant for
quick analysis within the CAD environment

Part 1
– ANSYS/ProFEA - for ANSYS analysis & design optimization
within Pro/ENGINEER

1
001289
30 Nov 1999
2-7
FEA and ANSYS
…About ANSYS Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
ANSYS/ ANSYS/ ANSYS/
Professional Mechanical ANSYS/ Emag
Multiphysics

ANSYS/ ANSYS/

TO ANSYS
Structural ProFEA
ANSYS/

ANSYS 5.6
ED
ANSYS/
FLOTRAN

5.6 -- Part
ANSYS/ DesignSpace
ANSYS/ ANSYS/

Part 1
LS-DYNA
PrepPost University

1
001289
30 Nov 1999
2-8
FEA and ANSYS - About ANSYS
Structural Analysis Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Structural analysis is used to determine deformations,
strains, stresses, and reaction forces.
• Static analysis
– Used for static loading conditions.
– Nonlinear behavior such as large deflections, large strain,
contact, plasticity, hyperelasticity, and creep can be simulated.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 5.6
5.6 -- Part
Part 1
1
Hyperelastic Seal
001289
30 Nov 1999
2-9
FEA and ANSYS - About ANSYS
…Structural Analysis Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Dynamic analysis
– Includes mass and damping effects.
– Modal analysis calculates natural frequencies and mode shapes.
– Harmonic analysis determines a structure’s response to
sinusoidal loads of known amplitude and frequency.
– Transient Dynamic analysis determines a structure’s response

TO ANSYS
to time-varying loads and can include nonlinear behavior.

ANSYS 5.6
• Other structural capabilities
– Spectrum analysis

5.6 -- Part
– Random vibrations
– Eigenvalue buckling

Part 1
– Substructuring, submodeling

1
001289
30 Nov 1999
2-10
FEA and ANSYS - About ANSYS
…Structural Analysis Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Explicit Dynamics with ANSYS/LS-DYNA
– Intended for very large deformation simulations where inertia
forces are dominant.
– Used to simulate impact, crushing, rapid forming, etc.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 5.6
5.6 -- Part
Part 1
1
001289
30 Nov 1999
2-11
FEA and ANSYS - About ANSYS
Thermal Analysis Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Thermal analysis is used to determine the temperature
distribution in an object. Other quantities of interest include
amount of heat lost or gained, thermal gradients, and thermal
flux.
• All three primary heat transfer modes can be simulated:
conduction, convection, radiation.

TO ANSYS
• Steady-State

ANSYS 5.6
– Time-dependent effects are
ignored.

• Transient

5.6 -- Part
– To determine temperatures,

Part 1
etc. as a function of time.
– Allows phase change (melting

1
or freezing) to be simulated.
001289
30 Nov 1999
2-12
FEA and ANSYS - About ANSYS
Electromagnetics Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Electromagnetic analysis is used to calculate magnetic fields
in electromagnetic devices.
• Static and low-frequency electromagnetics
– To simulate devices operating with DC power sources, low-
frequency AC, or low-frequency transient signals.
– Example: solenoid actuators,

TO ANSYS
motors, transformers

ANSYS 5.6
– Quantities of interest include
magnetic flux density, field
intensity, magnetic forces and

5.6 -- Part
torques, impedance,
inductance, eddy currents,
power loss, and flux leakage.

Part 1
1
001289
30 Nov 1999
2-13
FEA and ANSYS - About ANSYS
...Electromagnetics Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• High-frequency electromagnetics
– To simulate devices with propagating electromagnetic waves.
– Example: microwave and RF passive components, waveguides,
coaxial connectors
– Quantities of interest include S-parameters, Q-factor, Return
loss, dielectric and conducting losses, and electric and magnetic

TO ANSYS
fields.

ANSYS 5.6
5.6 -- Part
Part 1
1
Electric field (EFSUM) in a coaxial cable 001289
30 Nov 1999
2-14
FEA and ANSYS - About ANSYS
...Electromagnetics Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Electrostatics
– To calculate the electric field from voltage or charge excitation.
– Example: High voltage devices, micro-electromechanical
systems (MEMS), transmission lines
– Typical quantities of interest are electric field strength and
capacitance.

TO ANSYS
• Current Conduction

ANSYS 5.6
– To calculate current in a conductor from an applied voltage

• Circuit Coupling

5.6 -- Part
– To couple electric circuits with electromagnetic devices

Part 1
1
001289
30 Nov 1999
2-15
FEA and ANSYS - About ANSYS
...Electromagnetics Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Types of electromagnetic analysis:
– Static analysis calculates magnetic fields due to direct current
(DC) or permanent magnets.
– Harmonic analysis calculates magnetic fields due to alternating
current (AC).
– Transient analysis is used for time-varying magnetic fields.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 5.6
5.6 -- Part
Part 1
1
001289
30 Nov 1999
2-16
FEA and ANSYS - About ANSYS
Fluid Analysis Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD)
– To determine the flow distributions and temperatures in a fluid.
– ANSYS/FLOTRAN can simulate laminar and turbulent flow,
compressible and incompressible flow, and multiple species.
– Applications: aerospace, electronic packaging, automotive
design

TO ANSYS
– Typical quantities of interest are velocities, pressures,
temperatures, and film coefficients.

ANSYS 5.6
5.6 -- Part
Part 1
1
001289
30 Nov 1999
2-17
FEA and ANSYS - About ANSYS
…Fluid Analysis Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Acoustics
– To simulate the interaction between a fluid medium and the
surrounding solid.
– Example: speakers, automobile interiors, sonars
– Typical quantities of interest are pressure distribution,
displacements, and natural frequencies.

TO ANSYS
• Contained-Fluid Analysis

ANSYS 5.6
– To simulate the effects of a contained, non-flowing fluid and
calculate hydrostatic pressures due to sloshing.
– Example: oil tankers, other liquid containers

5.6 -- Part
• Heat and Mass Transport

Part 1
– A one-dimensional element is used to calculate the heat
generated by mass transport between two points, such as in a

1
pipe.
001289
30 Nov 1999
2-18
FEA and ANSYS - About ANSYS
Coupled-Field Analysis Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Coupled-Field Analysis considers the mutual interaction
between two or more fields. The fact that each field depends
upon another makes it impossible to solve each separately,
therefore you need a program that can solve both physics
problems by combining them.

• Examples:

TO ANSYS
– Thermal-stress analysis

ANSYS 5.6
– Piezoelectrics (electric & structural )
– Acoustics (fluid & structural)
– Thermal-electric analysis

5.6 -- Part
– Induction heating (magnetic and thermal)

Part 1
Deflection of a bi-metal
– Electrostatic-structural analysis
bar due to heating

1
001289
30 Nov 1999
2-19
FEA and ANSYS
C. About the Company Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
ANSYS, Inc.
• Developer of ANSYS family of products
• Headquartered in Canonsburg, PA - USA (south of
Pittsburgh)

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 5.6
5.6 -- Part
Part 1
1
001289
30 Nov 1999
2-20
FEA and ANSYS
…About the Company Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
ANSYS Support Distributors (ASDs)
• Sales and support network for ANSYS
• Over 75 offices worldwide
• Local expertise for ANSYS consulting and training

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 5.6
5.6 -- Part
Part 1
1
001289
30 Nov 1999
2-21
FEA and ANSYS
…About the Company Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
ANSYS Support Coordinator (ASC)
• Contact for ANSYS at your company site
• Focal point for ANSYS correspondence; software updates,
error notices, newsletter and other mailings, etc.

TO ANSYS
For more information about ANSYS and the company:

ANSYS 5.6
• www.ansys.com
• On-line documentation

5.6 -- Part
• Training manuals from other ANSYS courses

Part 1
1
001289
30 Nov 1999
2-22
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS 9Part 1
10.0 -- 9Part
ANSYS 10.0 1
Training Manual

3. ANSYS Basics
3. ANSYS Basics
Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• In this chapter, we will discuss the basics of how to enter and
exit ANSYS, how to use the GUI and on-line help, and the
database and files created by ANSYS.
• Topics Covered:
A. Starting ANSYS
B. The GUI

TO ANSYS
C. Graphics & Picking

ANSYS 10.0
D. On-Line Help
E. The Database and Files

10.0-
F. Exiting ANSYS

10.0-- Part
G. Workshop

Part 1
1
ANSYS Basics
A. Starting ANSYS Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• There are two ways to start ANSYS:
– By Launcher
– By Pro-E

Launcher

TO ANSYS
• Allows you to start ANSYS

ANSYS 10.0
and other ANSYS utilities
by pressing:

10.0-
10.0-- Part
start button/ all programs/

Part 1
Ansys 10.0/ Ansys Product Launcher

1
ANSYS Basics
...Starting ANSYS Training Manual

Launcher (cont’d)

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
•After select:
Simulation environment: Ansys (Default)
License: ANSYS Multiphysics, Mechanical U, Professional (according to analysis)
• After choosing the desired start-up options, press the Run button to start ANSYS.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0-
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS 10.0- Part 1
10.0-- Part
ANSYS 10.0 1
Training Manual

– By Pro-E
ANSYS Basics
...Starting ANSYS Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• The working directory is the directory in which the command
is issued.
• Refer to your ANSYS Installation and Configuration Guide for
details on the command line options.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0-
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
ANSYS Basics
B. The GUI Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Entering ANSYS brings up the following GUI windows:
Input Utility Menu
Displays program Contains functions
prompt messages which are available
and a text field for throughout the
typing commands. ANSYS session, such
All previously typed as file controls,
commands appear for selecting, graphics
easy reference and controls, parameters,
access. and exiting.

TO ANSYS
Main Menu Toolbar
Contains the primary Contains push
ANSYS functions, buttons for executing

ANSYS 10.0
organized by commonly used
processors ANSYS commands
(preprocessor, and functions.
solution, general Customized buttons
postprocessor, etc.) can be created.

10.0-
10.0-- Part
Graphics
Displays graphics
created in ANSYS or
imported into ANSYS.

Part 1
Visualization Toolbar
Displays views, zoom

1
and rotate the
graphics area
ANSYS Basics
...The GUI Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Main Menu
• Contains the main functions
required for an analysis.

• Independent, “sticky” windows allow

TO ANSYS
you to complete all necessary steps

ANSYS 10.0
before moving on to the next function.

10.0-
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Conventions:

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
(…) indicates a dialog box
( ) indicates an action

10.0-
10.0-- Part
(+) indicates a submenu

Part 1
1
ANSYS Basics
...The GUI Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Utility Menu

• Contains utilities that are generally available throughout the


ANSYS session: graphics, on-line help, select logic, file
controls, etc.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0-
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
ANSYS Basics
...The GUI Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Input Window
• Allows you to enter commands. (Most GUI functions actually
“send” commands to ANSYS. If you know these commands,
you can type them in the Input Window.)
• Also used for prompts during graphical picking.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0-
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
ANSYS Basics
...The GUI Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Toolbar
• Contains abbreviations -- short-cuts to commonly used
commands and functions.
• A few predefined abbreviations are available, but you can add
your own. Requires knowledge of ANSYS commands.

TO ANSYS
• A powerful feature which you can use to create your own
“button menu” system!

ANSYS 10.0
10.0-
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
ANSYS Basics
...The GUI Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Layout
• You can also create your own layout and then
save it using Utility Menu > MenuCtrls > Save
Menu Layout.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0-
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
ANSYS Basics
...The GUI Training Manual

For example, if you are

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Preferences
• The Preferences dialog (Main Menu >
doing a thermal analysis, you
Preferences) allows you to filter out can choose to filter out other
menu choices that are not applicable disciplines, thereby reducing
to the current analysis.
the number of menu items
available in the GUI:

TO ANSYS
Only thermal element
types will be shown in the

ANSYS 10.0
element type selection
dialog.

10.0-
10.0-- Part
Only thermal loads will
be shown.

Part 1
Etc.

1
ANSYS Basics
...The GUI Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Other GUI Notes
• Some dialog boxes have both Apply and OK buttons.
– Apply applies the dialog settings, but retains (does not close) the
dialog box for repeated use.
– OK applies the dialog settings and closes the dialog box.

• The Output Window is independent of the ANSYS menus.

TO ANSYS
Caution: Closing the output window closes the entire ANSYS

ANSYS 10.0
session!
• Remember that you are not restricted to using the menus. If

10.0-
you know the command, feel free to enter it in the Input

10.0-- Part
Window!

Part 1
1
ANSYS Basics
...The GUI Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Demo:
– Start ANSYS using the launcher
– Show the various parts of the GUI
– Bring up “Keypoints in Active CS” dialog box and show the
difference between OK and Apply
– Show the Preferences dialog

TO ANSYS
– Explain the Output window

ANSYS 10.0
10.0-
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
ANSYS Basics
C. Graphics & Picking Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• The most heavily used interactive
capabilities are graphics and graphical
picking.
– Graphics is used to visualize the model,
loading, results, and other input and
output data.
– Picking is used for model creation,

TO ANSYS
meshing, loading, etc.

ANSYS 10.0
• Use Plot in the Utility menu to produce
plots, or issue the commands shown.

10.0-
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
ANSYS Basics
...Graphics & Picking Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• The PlotCtrls menu is used to control
how the plot is displayed:
– plot orientation
– zoom
– colors
– symbols

TO ANSYS
– annotation

ANSYS 10.0
– animation
– etc.

10.0-
10.0-- Part
• Among these, changing the plot
orientation (view) and zooming are the
most commonly used functions.

Part 1
1
ANSYS Basics
...Graphics & Picking Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• The default view for a model is the front
view: looking down the +Z axis of the
model.
• To change it, use dynamic mode — a way
to orient the plot dynamically using the
Control key and mouse buttons.
– Ctrl + Left mouse button pans the model.

TO ANSYS
– Ctrl + Middle mouse button:

ANSYS 10.0
¤ zooms the model
£ spins the model (about screen Z)
– Ctrl + Right mouse button rotates the model:

10.0-
10.0-- Part
¤ about screen X P Z R

£ about screen Y

Part 1
Ctrl

1
ANSYS Basics
...Graphics & Picking Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• If you don’t want to hold down the
Control key, you can use the Dynamic
Mode setting in the Pan-Zoom-Rotate
dialog box.
– The same mouse button assignments
apply.
– On 3-D graphics devices, you can also

TO ANSYS
dynamically orient the light source.

ANSYS 10.0
Useful for different light source
shading effects.

10.0-
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
ANSYS Basics
...Graphics & Picking Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Other functions in the Pan- Front +Z view, from (0,0,1)
Zoom-Rotate dialog box: Back -Z view (0,0,-1)
Top +Y view (0,1,0)
– Preset views Bot -Y view (0,-1,0)
Right +X view (1,0,0)
– Zoom-in on specific regions Left -X view (-1,0,0)
of the model Iso Isometric (1,1,1)
Obliq Oblique (1,2,3)
– Pan, zoom, or rotate in WP Working plane view
discrete increments (as

TO ANSYS
specified by the Rate slider)

ANSYS 10.0
Zoom By picking center of a
• Rotation is about the square
screen X, Y, Z Box Zoom By picking two
corners of a box
coordinates. Win Zoom Same as Box Zoom,

10.0-
10.0-- Part
but box is proportional
to window.
Back Up “Unzoom” to previous
zoom.

Part 1
Fit the plot to the window Reset everything

1
Close Pan-Zoom-Rotate to default
ANSYS Basics
...Graphics & Picking Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Picking
• Picking allows you to identify model
entities or locations by clicking in the
Graphics Window.
• A picking operation typically involves the
use of the mouse and a picker menu. It is

TO ANSYS
indicated by a + sign on the menu.

ANSYS 10.0
• For example, you can create keypoints by
picking locations in the Graphics Window
and then pressing OK in the picker.

10.0-
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
ANSYS Basics
...Graphics & Picking Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Two types of picking:
Example of
• Retrieval picking Retrieval Picker
– Picking existing entities for a
subsequent operation.
– Allows you to enter entity
numbers in the Input Window.

TO ANSYS
– Use the Pick All button to

ANSYS 10.0
indicate all entities.

• Locational picking
– Locating coordinates of a point,

10.0-
10.0-- Part
such as a keypoint or node.
– Allows you to enter coordinates Example of

Part 1
in the Input Window. Locational Picker

1
ANSYS Basics
...Graphics & Picking Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Mouse button assignments for picking:
• Left mouse button picks (or unpicks)
the entity or location closest to the
mouse pointer. Pressing and dragging Apply
allows you to “preview” the item being Toggle
picked (or unpicked). Pick
Pick / Unpick

TO ANSYS
• Middle mouse button does an Apply.

ANSYS 10.0
Saves the time required to move the
mouse over to the Picker and press the
Apply button. Use Shift-Right button on

10.0-
a two-button mouse.

10.0-- Part
• Right mouse button toggles between

Part 1
pick and unpick mode.

1
ANSYS Basics
...Graphics & Picking Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Demo:
– Show locational picking by creating a few keypoints. Also show
the use of middle and right mouse buttons.
– Show retrieval picking by creating a few lines
– Show “Pick All” by creating an AL area
– Do KPLOT, LPLOT, etc. with and without numbering. Type in a

TO ANSYS
few of these commands.

ANSYS 10.0
– Show the use of pan-zoom-rotate

10.0-
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
ANSYS Basics
D. On-Line Help Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• ANSYS uses an HTML-based documentation system to
provide extensive on-line help.
• You can get help on:
– ANSYS commands
– element types
– analysis procedures

TO ANSYS
– special GUI “widgets” such as Pan-Zoom-Rotate

ANSYS 10.0
10.0-
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
ANSYS Basics
...On-Line Help Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• There are several ways to start the help system:
– Launcher > Help System
– Utility Menu > Help > Help Topics
– Any dialog box > Help
– Type HELP,name in the Input Window. Name is a command or
element name.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0-
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
ANSYS Basics
...On-Line Help Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Pressing the Help System buttton on the launcher brings up two
browser windows:
– a navigational window containing Table of Contents and Index
– a document window containing the help information.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0-
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
ANSYS Basics
...On-Line Help Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Use the navigational window to choose the desired chapter
or section within a particular document.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0-
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
ANSYS Basics
...On-Line Help Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• In the document window, use the standard Back and Forward
buttons on your browser, or the navigational buttons that
appear at the top and bottom of each topic.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0-
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
ANSYS Basics
...On-Line Help Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• The Search button in the document window allows you to
search for words or phrases.
• Click on Using the Search Window in the start-up help page
(file:/ansys56/docu/catalog/english/ansyshelp/toc.html) for details
on how to use the search facility.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0-
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
ANSYS Basics
...On-Line Help Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• ANSYS also provides an HTML-based on-line tutorial.
• The tutorial consists of detailed instructions for a set of
problems solved in ANSYS.
• To access the tutorial, click on Utility Menu > Help > ANSYS
Tutorials.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0-
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
ANSYS Basics
...On-Line Help Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Demo:
– Launch the help system from the launcher
– Bring up an Analysis Guide
– Type “help,kplot” in the Input window
– Go back to start-up Help page and click on Using the Search
Window

TO ANSYS
– Search for the string “contact wizard”

ANSYS 10.0
10.0-
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
ANSYS Basics
E. The Database & Files Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• The term ANSYS database refers to the data ANSYS
maintains in memory as you build, solve, and postprocess
your model.
• The database stores both your input data and ANSYS results
data:
– Input data -- information you must enter, such as model

TO ANSYS
dimensions, material properties, and load data.
– Results data -- quantities that ANSYS calculates, such as

ANSYS 10.0
displacements, stresses, strains, and reaction forces.

10.0-
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
ANSYS Basics
...The Database & Files Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Save and Resume
• Since the database is stored in the computer’s memory
(RAM), it is good practice to save it to disk frequently so that
you can restore the information in the event of a computer
crash or power failure.
• The SAVE operation copies the database from memory to a

TO ANSYS
file called the database file (or db file for short).

ANSYS 10.0
– The easiest way to do a save is to click on Toolbar > SAVE_DB
– Or use:
• Utility Menu > File > Save as Jobname.db

10.0-
10.0-- Part
• Utility Menu > File > Save as…
• SAVE command

Part 1
1
ANSYS Basics
...The Database & Files Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• To restore the database from the db file back into memory,
use the RESUME operation.
– Toolbar > RESUME_DB
– Or use:
• Utility Menu > File > Resume Jobname.db
• Utility Menu > File > Resume from…

TO ANSYS
• RESUME command

ANSYS 10.0
• The default file name for SAVE and RESUME is jobname.db,
but you can choose a different name by using the “Save as”
or “Resume from” functions.

10.0-
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
ANSYS Basics
...The Database & Files Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Notes on SAVE and RESUME:
– Choosing the Save as or Resume from function does NOT
change the current jobname.
– If you save to the default file name and a jobname.db already
exists, ANSYS will first copy the “old” file to jobname.dbb as a
back-up.
– The db file is simply a “snapshot” of what is in memory at the

TO ANSYS
time the save is done.

ANSYS 10.0
10.0-
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
ANSYS Basics
...The Database & Files Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Tips on SAVE and RESUME:
– Periodically save the database as you progress through an
analysis. ANSYS does NOT do automatic saves.
– You should definitely SAVE the database before attempting an
unfamiliar operation (such as a Boolean or meshing) or an
operation that may cause major changes (such as a delete).
• RESUME can then be used as an “undo” if you don’t like the

TO ANSYS
results of that operation.

ANSYS 10.0
– SAVE is also recommended before doing a solve.

10.0-
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
ANSYS Basics
...The Database & Files Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Clearing the Database
• The Clear Database operation allows
you to “zero out” the database and
start fresh. It is similar to exiting
and re-entering ANSYS.
– Utility Menu > File > Clear & Start New

TO ANSYS
– Or use the /CLEAR command.

ANSYS 10.0
10.0-
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
ANSYS Basics
...The Database & Files Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Files
• ANSYS writes and reads several files during an analysis. File
names are of the format jobname.ext.
• Jobname
– A name you choose while starting ANSYS, up to 32 characters.
Defaults to file.

TO ANSYS
– Can be changed within ANSYS with the /FILNAME command

ANSYS 10.0
(Utility Menu > File > Change Jobname).

• Extension

10.0-
10.0-- Part
– Identifies the contents of the file, such as .db for database.
– Usually assigned by ANSYS.

Part 1
1
ANSYS Basics
...The Database & Files Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Typical files:
jobname.log: Log file, ASCII.
• Contains a log of every command issued during the session.
• If you start a second session with the same jobname in the same
working directory, ANSYS will append to the previous log file (with a
time stamp).
jobname.err: Error file, ASCII.

TO ANSYS
• Contains all errors and warnings encountered during the session.

ANSYS 10.0
jobname.db, .dbb: Database file, binary.
• Compatible across all platforms.
jobname.rst, .rth, .rmg, .rfl: Results files, binary.

10.0-
10.0-- Part
• Contains results data calculated by ANSYS during solution.
• Compatible across all platforms.

Part 1
1
ANSYS Basics
...The Database & Files Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
File Management Tips
• Run each analysis project in a separate working directory.
• Use different jobnames to differentiate various analysis runs.
• You should keep the following files after any ANSYS
analysis:

TO ANSYS
– log file ( .log), database file ( .db), results files, load step files, if
any (.s01, .s02, ...), physics files (.ph1, .ph2, ...).

ANSYS 10.0
• Use /DELETE or Utility Menu > File > ANSYS File Options to
automatically delete files no longer needed by ANSYS during

10.0-
10.0-- Part
that session.

Part 1
1
ANSYS Basics
F. Exiting ANSYS Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Three ways to exit ANSYS:
– Toolbar > QUIT
– Utility Menu > File > Exit
– Use the /EXIT command in the Input Window

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0-
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
ANSYS Basics
G. Workshop Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Refer to your Workshop Supplement for instructions on:
W1. Introductory Workshop

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0-
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION ANSYS 10.0-
TO ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0-- Part 1
Training Manual

4. Stress Analysis
Stress Analysis
Overview Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Stress analysis is a general term used to describe analyses
where the results quantities include stresses and strains. It
is also known as structural analysis.
• As described in Chapter 2, ANSYS allows several types of
stress analyses:
Static Transient Dynamic

TO ANSYS
Modal Spectrum

ANSYS 10.0-
Harmonic Explicit Dynamics

• In this chapter, we will use a linear static analysis to describe


the steps involved in an analysis. By mastering these steps,

10.0
10.0-- Part
you can quickly learn how to do other analyses.

Part 1
1
Stress Analysis
...Overview Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Topics covered:
A. Analysis Steps
B. Geometry
C. Meshing
D. Loading
E. Solve

TO ANSYS
F. Reviewing Results

ANSYS 10.0-
G. Checking Validity of Solution
H. Workshop

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Stress Analysis
A. Analysis Steps Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Every analysis involves three main steps:
• Preprocessing
– Create or import the model geometry
Preprocessing
– Mesh the geometry

• Solution

TO ANSYS
– Apply loads
Solution

ANSYS 10.0-
– Solve

• Postprocessing

10.0
10.0-- Part
– Review results
– Check the validity of the solution Postprocessing

Part 1
1
Stress Analysis
...Analysis Steps Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Notice that the ANSYS Main Menu is also organized in terms
of preprocessing, solution, and postprocessing.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Stress Analysis
...Analysis Steps Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• The preprocessor (called PREP7 in ANSYS) is where you
provide the majority of the input to the program.
• Its main purpose is to generate the finite element model,
which consists mainly of nodes, elements, and material
property definitions. You can also use PREP7 to apply loads.
• Usually begins with definition of the model geometry.

TO ANSYS
• A solid model model is typically used to represent model

ANSYS 10.0-
geometry.
– A CAD-type mathematical representation that defines the

10.0
geometry of the structure.

10.0-- Part
– May consist of solids or just surfaces, depending on what is
being modeled.

Part 1
1
Stress Analysis - Preprocessing
B. Geometry Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• A typical solid model is defined by volumes, areas, lines, and
keypoints.
– Volumes are bounded by areas. They represent solid objects.
– Areas are bounded by lines. They represent faces of solid
objects, or planar or shell objects.
– Lines are bounded by keypoints. They represent edges of

TO ANSYS
objects.
– Keypoints are locations in 3-D space. They represent vertices of

ANSYS 10.0-
objects.

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
Volumes

1
Areas Lines & Keypoints
Stress Analysis - Preprocessing
...Geometry Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• There is a built-in hierarchy among solid model
entities. Keypoints are the “foundation” entities. Volumes
Lines are “built” from the keypoints, areas from Areas
lines, and volumes from areas. Lines

• This hierarchy holds true regardless of how the Keypoints


solid model is created.

TO ANSYS
• ANSYS will not allow you to delete or modify a lower-order

ANSYS 10.0-
entity if it is attached to a higher-order entity. (Certain types
of modifications are allowed… discussed later.)
Volumes

10.0
10.0-- Part
I’ll just
change Areas OOPs! Vo
this line

Areas
l
Lines Lines um

Part 1
es
Keypoints Keypoints

1
Stress Analysis - Preprocessing
...Geometry Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• You can either create a solid model in ANSYS or import it
from another software package.
• Details of both methods will be presented later. For now, we
will briefly discuss how to import an IGES file and scale the
geometry if needed.
• IGES (Initial Graphics Exchange Specification) is a way to

TO ANSYS
transfer solid model geometry from one software package to

ANSYS 10.0-
another.
– An IGES file is ASCII, allowing it to be easily transported
between computer systems.

10.0
10.0-- Part
– Most packages, including ANSYS, allow you to write as well as
read an IGES file.

Part 1
1
Stress Analysis - Preprocessing
...Geometry Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• To import an IGES file into ANSYS:
– Utility Menu > File > Import > IGES...
• In the resulting dialog box, choose the
alternate method* (Alte no defeatur) and
press OK (defaults for everything else).
• In the second dialog box, choose the
desired file and press OK.

TO ANSYS
– OR use the IGESIN command:

ANSYS 10.0-
• /aux15
• ioptn,iges,alte

10.0
10.0-- Part
• igesin,filename,extension,directory
• finish

Part 1
1
* Details about the default vs. alternate method and the other options will be presented later.
Stress Analysis - Preprocessing
...Geometry Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• When the import is completed, ANSYS will automatically plot
the geometry.

• You may then modify the


geometry as needed.
– ANSYS allows many
operations on the solid

TO ANSYS
model, which we will
describe later.

ANSYS 10.0-
– For now, we will discuss
how to scale the model to a
different set of units. (Note:

10.0
10.0-- Part
Scaling is NOT available for
a default IGES import.)

Part 1
1
Stress Analysis - Preprocessing
...Geometry Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Scaling is typically needed when you want to convert the geometry
to a different set of units, say from inches to millimeters.
• To scale a model in ANSYS:
– First save the database -- Toolbar >
SAVE_DB or SAVE command.
– Then Main Menu > Preprocessor >
Modeling > Operate > Scale > Volumes

TO ANSYS
(choose the highest-level entity
available in the model)

ANSYS 10.0-
• [Pick All] to pick all volumes
• Then enter desired scale factors
for RX, RY, RZ and set IMOVE to

10.0
10.0-- Part
“Moved” instead of “Copied”
– Or use the VLSCALE command:

Part 1
• vlscale,all,,,25.4,25.4,25.4,,,1

1
Stress Analysis - Preprocessing
...Geometry Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Demo:
– Import pipe.igs using:
• alternate method
• SOLID off
– Orient the model as shown
– Save as pipe.db

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Stress Analysis - Preprocessing
...Geometry Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Preprocessing
 Geometry
– Meshing

• Solution
– Loading

TO ANSYS
– Solve

ANSYS 10.0-
• Postprocessing
– Review results
– Check validity of solution

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Stress Analysis - Preprocessing
C. Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Meshing is the process used to “fill” the solid model with
nodes and elements, i.e, to create the FEA model.
– Remember, you need nodes and elements for the finite element
solution, not just the solid model. The solid model does NOT
participate in the finite element solution.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
meshing

Solid model FEA model

Part 1
1
Stress Analysis - Preprocessing
...Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• There are three steps to meshing:
– Define element attributes
– Specify mesh controls
– Generate the mesh

TO ANSYS
• Element attributes are characteristics of the finite element
model that you must establish prior to meshing. They

ANSYS 10.0-
include:
– Element types

10.0
10.0-- Part
– Real constants
– Material properties

Part 1
1
Stress Analysis - Preprocessing
...Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Element Type
• The element type is an important choice that determines the
following element characteristics:
– DOF set. A thermal element type, for example, has one dof:
TEMP, whereas a structural element type may have up to six dof:
UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ.

TO ANSYS
– Element shape -- brick, tetrahedron, quadrilateral, triangle, etc.

ANSYS 10.0-
– Dimensionality -- 2-D (X-Y plane only), or 3-D.
– Assumed displacement shape -- linear vs. quadratic.

10.0
• ANSYS has a “library” of over 150 element types from which

10.0-- Part
you can choose. Details on how to choose the “correct”
element type will be presented later. For now, let’s see how

Part 1
to define an element type.

1
Stress Analysis - Preprocessing
...Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• To define an element type:
– Preprocessor > Element Type >
Add/Edit/Delete
• [Add] to add new element
type
• Choose the desired type
(such as SOLID92) and

TO ANSYS
press OK

ANSYS 10.0-
• [Options] to specify
additional element options
– Or use the ET command:

10.0
10.0-- Part
• et,1,solid92

Part 1
1
Stress Analysis - Preprocessing
...Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Notes:
– Setting preferences to the desired discipline (Main Menu >
Preferences) will show only the element types valid for that
discipline.
– You should define the element type early in the preprocessing
phase because many of the menu choices in the GUI are filtered
out based on the current DOF set. For example, if you choose a

TO ANSYS
structural element type, thermal load choices will be “grayed

ANSYS 10.0-
out” or not shown at all.

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Stress Analysis - Preprocessing
...Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Real Constants
• Real constants are used for geometric properties that cannot
be completely defined by the element’s geometry. For
example:
– A beam element is defined by a line joining two nodes. This
defines only the length of the beam. To specify the beam’s

TO ANSYS
cross-sectional properties, such as the area and moment of
inertia, you need to use real constants.

ANSYS 10.0-
– A shell element is defined by a quadrilateral or triangular area.
This defines only the surface area of the shell. To specify the
shell thickness, you need to use real constants.

10.0
10.0-- Part
– Most 3-D solid elements do not require a real constant since the
element geometry is fully defined by its nodes.

Part 1
1
Stress Analysis - Preprocessing
...Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• To define real constants:
– Preprocessor > Real Constants
• [Add] to add a new real constant set.
• If multiple element types have been defined, choose the
element type for which you are specifying real constants.
• Then enter the real constant values.

TO ANSYS
– Or use the R family of commands.

ANSYS 10.0-
• Different element types require different real constants, and
some don’t require any real constants. Check the Elements
Manual, available on-line, for details.

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Stress Analysis - Preprocessing
...Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Material Properties
• Every analysis requires some material property input:
Young’s modulus EX for structural elements, thermal
conductivity KXX for thermal elements, etc.
• There are two ways to define material properties:
– Material library

TO ANSYS
– Failure Criteria

ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Stress Analysis - Preprocessing
...Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Using the Material Library
• This method allows you to choose a predefined set of properties for
a given material.
• ANSYS supplies typical structural and thermal properties (linear
only) for some common materials, but we strongly recommend that
you create your own material library.

TO ANSYS
• To choose a material from the library:

ANSYS 10.0-
– First define the library path.
• Preprocessor > Material Props >
Material Library > Library Path

10.0
– Enter the location from which

10.0-- Part
to READ material data, e.g,
/ansys56/matlib.

Part 1
• Or use the /MPLIB command.

1
Stress Analysis - Preprocessing
...Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
– Then “import” a material from the library.
• Preprocessor > Material Props > Material Library > Import Library
– Choose the units system. This is used only to filter the list of files
shown in the subsequent dialog. ANSYS has no knowledge of
units and does NOT do unit conversion.
– Choose the desired material file, such as steel AISI C1020.
• Or use the MPREAD command with the LIB option.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Stress Analysis - Preprocessing
...Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Specifying Individual Material Properties
• Instead of choosing a material name, this method involves
directly specifying the required properties.

• To specify individual properties:


– Preprocessor > Material Props >

TO ANSYS
Material models >Isotropic
• Specify material number,

ANSYS 10.0-
usually 1.
• Then enter the individual
property values.

10.0
10.0-- Part
– Or use the MP command.

Part 1
1
Stress Analysis - Preprocessing
...Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
A Note on Units
• You do not need to tell ANSYS the system of units you are
using. Simply decide what units you will use, then make sure
all of your input is consistent.
– For example, if the model geometry is in inches, make sure that
all other input data — material properties, real constants, loads,

TO ANSYS
etc. — are in terms of inches.

ANSYS 10.0-
• ANSYS does NOT do units conversion! It simply accepts all
numbers you input without questioning their validity.
• The command /UNITS allows you to specify a units system,

10.0
10.0-- Part
but it is simply a recording device to let other users of your
model know what units you used.

Part 1
1
Stress Analysis - Preprocessing
...Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Specifying Mesh Controls is the second step in meshing.
• Many mesh controls are available in ANSYS. For now, we will
present a simple method of specifying mesh density, called
SmartSizing.
• SmartSizing is an algorithm that assigns element divisions to
all lines in the model based on line length, curvature, and

TO ANSYS
proximity to holes, etc.

ANSYS 10.0-
• You simply specify a “size level” ranging from 1 (very fine
mesh) to 10 (very coarse mesh), and ANSYS takes care of the
rest.

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Stress Analysis - Preprocessing
...Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• The MeshTool is the best way to specify mesh
controls:
– Preprocessor > Meshing > MeshTool.
– Activate SmartSizing. Size level defaults to 6.

Generating the mesh is the final step in meshing.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
• First save the database.
• Then press [Mesh] in the MeshTool.
– This brings up a picker. Press [Pick All] in the picker to

10.0
10.0-- Part
indicate all entities.

Part 1
1
Stress Analysis - Preprocessing
...Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• When the meshing is complete, ANSYS will automatically plot
the elements.
– The default element plot shows all element edges as straight
lines even for a quadratic element type.
– To show curved element edges, issue /EFACET,2 (or Utility Menu
> PlotCtrls > Style > Size and Shape…).

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Stress Analysis - Preprocessing
...Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Demo:
– Resume pipe.db (if needed)
– Define SHELL63 element type
– Specify real constant thickness = 1/8 in
– Use the material library option for material properties:
• set library path to /ansys56/matlib

TO ANSYS
• BIN units

ANSYS 10.0-
• Al_a2024-T3
– Save as pipe.db, then mesh the model using SMRT,4

10.0
10.0-- Part
– Save as pipemesh.db

Part 1
1
Stress Analysis - Preprocessing
…Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Preprocessing
 Geometry
 Meshing

• Solution
– Loading

TO ANSYS
– Solve

ANSYS 10.0-
• Postprocessing
– Review results
– Check validity of solution

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Stress Analysis - Solution
D. Loading Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• The solution step is where we apply loads on the object and
let the solver calculate the finite element solution.
• Loads are available both in the Solution and Preprocessor
menus.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Stress Analysis - Solution
...Loading Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• There are five categories of loads:
DOF Constraints Specified DOF values, such as
displacements in a stress analysis or
temperatures in a thermal analysis.
Concentrated Loads Point loads, such as forces or heat flow
rates.

TO ANSYS
Surface Loads Loads distributed over a surface, such as
pressures or convections.

ANSYS 10.0-
Body Loads Volumetric or field loads, such as
temperatures (causing thermal expansion)
or internal heat generation.

10.0
10.0-- Part
Inertia Loads Loads due to structural mass or inertia,
such as gravity and rotational velocity.

Part 1
1
Stress Analysis - Solution
...Loading Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• You can apply loads either on the solid model or directly on
the FEA model (nodes and elements).
– Solid model loads are easier to apply because there are fewer
entities to pick.
– Moreover, solid model loads are independent of the mesh. You
don’t need to reapply the loads if you change the mesh.

TO ANSYS
Pressure on line Pressures on element faces

ANSYS 10.0-
Constraint Constraints

10.0
10.0-- Part
on line at nodes

Solid model FEA model

Part 1
1
Force at keypoint Force at node
Stress Analysis - Solution
...Loading Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Regardless of how you apply the loads, the solver expects all
loads to be in terms of the finite element model. Therefore,
solid model loads are automatically transferred to the
underlying nodes and elements during solution.
• We will now discuss how to apply the following types of
structural loads:

TO ANSYS
– Displacement constraints

ANSYS 10.0-
– Pressures
– Gravity

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Stress Analysis - Solution
...Loading Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Displacement Constraints
• Used to specify where the model is fixed (zero displacement
locations).
• Can also be non-zero, to simulate a known deflection.
• To apply displacement constraints :
– Solution > Define Loads > Apply >

TO ANSYS
Structural > Displacement

ANSYS 10.0-
• Choose where you want to apply
the constraint.
• Pick the desired entities in the
graphics window.

10.0
10.0-- Part
• Then choose the constraint
direction. Value defaults to zero.

Part 1
– Or use the D family of commands:
DK, DL, DA, D.

1
Stress Analysis - Solution
...Loading Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Displacement constraints are also used to enforce symmetry
or antisymmetry boundary conditions.
– Symmetry BC: Out-of-plane displacements and in-plane
rotations are fixed.
– Antisymmetry BC: In-plane displacements and out-of-plane
rotations are fixed.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
Y

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
Symmetry Boundary Antisymmetry Boundary
UX=0 UY=UZ=0
ROTY=ROTZ=0 ROTX=0

1
Stress Analysis - Solution
...Loading Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Pressures
• To apply a pressure:
– Solution > Define Loads > Apply >
Structural > Pressure
• Choose where you want to apply the
pressure -- usually on lines for 2-D
models, on areas for 3-D models.

TO ANSYS
• Pick the desired entities in the

ANSYS 10.0-
graphics window.
• Then enter the pressure value. A
positive value indicates a
compressive pressure (acting

10.0
10.0-- Part
towards the centroid of the
element).

Part 1
– Or use the SF family of commands:
SFL, SFA, SFE, SF.

1
Stress Analysis - Solution
...Loading Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• For a 2-D model, where
pressures are usually applied 500 500
on a line, you can specify a L3
tapered pressure by entering a VALI = 500
value for both the I and J ends
of the line. 1000
500

TO ANSYS
• I and J are determined by the
L3
line direction. If you see the

ANSYS 10.0-
VALI = 500
taper going in the wrong VALJ = 1000
direction, simply reapply the
pressure with the values 1000

10.0
10.0-- Part
reversed. 500
L3

Part 1
VALI = 1000
VALJ = 500

1
Stress Analysis - Solution
...Loading Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Gravity
• To apply gravitational acceleration:
– Solution > Define Loads > Apply >
Structural >Inertia > Gravity
– Or use the ACEL command.
• Notes:

TO ANSYS
– A positive acceleration value causes
deflection in the negative direction. If

ANSYS 10.0-
Y is pointing upwards, for example, a
positive ACELY value will cause the
structure to move downwards.

10.0
10.0-- Part
– Density (or mass in some form) must
be defined for gravity and other inertia
loads.

Part 1
1
Stress Analysis - Solution
...Loading Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Verifying applied loads
• Plot them by activating load symbols:
– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Symbols
– Commands -- /PBC, /PSF, /PBF

• Or list them:

TO ANSYS
– Utility Menu > List > Loads >

ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Stress Analysis - Solution
...Loading Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Modifying and Deleting Loads
• To modify a load value, simply reapply the load
with the new value.
• To delete loads:
– Solution > Define Loads > Delete

TO ANSYS
– When you delete solid model loads, ANSYS also
automatically deletes all corresponding finite

ANSYS 10.0-
element loads.

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Stress Analysis - Solution
...Loading Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Preprocessing
 Geometry
 Meshing

• Solution
 Loading

TO ANSYS
– Solve

ANSYS 10.0-
• Postprocessing
– Review results
– Check validity of solution

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Stress Analysis - Solution
E. Solve Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• The solve step is where you let the solver calculate the finite
element solution.
• First, it is a good idea to review and check your analysis data,
e.g:
– Consistent units
– Element types, options, and real constants

TO ANSYS
– Material properties

ANSYS 10.0-
• Density if inertia loading
• Coefficient of thermal expansion if thermal stress

10.0
– Mesh density, especially in stress concentration regions

10.0-- Part
– Load values and directions

Part 1
– Reference temperature for thermal expansions

1
Stress Analysis - Solution
…Solve Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• To initiate the solve:
– First save the database!
– Then:
• Solution > -Solve > Current LS
• Or issue the SOLVE command.

• The solver writes results data to the in-memory

TO ANSYS
database and to the results file, jobname.rst (or

ANSYS 10.0-
.rth, .rmg, .rfl).

Input

10.0
Data

10.0-- Part
Database Solver

Part 1
Results Results
Data Results File

1
Stress Analysis - Solution
…Solve Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• During solution, ANSYS provides a lot of useful information in the
Output Window, such as:
– Mass properties of the model
• The mass calculation is quite accurate; centroid and mass moment
calculations are rough approximations
– Range of element matrix coefficients
• May indicate a problem with material properties or real constants if

TO ANSYS
maximum/minimum ratio > 1.0E8

ANSYS 10.0-
– Model size and solver statistics
– Summary of files written and their sizes:
• jobname.emat - element matrix file

10.0
10.0-- Part
• jobname.esav - element saved data file
• jobname.tri - triangularized matrix file
• jobname.rst - results file

Part 1
1
Stress Analysis - Solution
…Solve Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Demo:
– Resume ribmesh.db (2-D plane stress model, thickness = 1/8 in)
– Fix left line in UX and bottom line in UY
– Pressure of 100 psi on top line
– List line constraints and pressures
– Save as ribload.db, then solve. Show output window during

TO ANSYS
solution.

ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Stress Analysis - Solution
…Solve Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Preprocessing
 Geometry
 Meshing

• Solution
 Loading

TO ANSYS
 Solve

ANSYS 10.0-
• Postprocessing
– Review results
– Check validity of solution

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Stress Analysis - Postprocessing
F. Reviewing Results Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Postprocessing is without doubt the most important step in
an analysis. You may be required to make design decisions
based on the results, so it is a good idea not only to review
the results carefully, but also to check the validity of the
solution.
• ANSYS has two postprocessors:

TO ANSYS
– POST1, the General Postprocessor, to review a single set of
results over the entire model.

ANSYS 10.0-
– POST26, the Time-History Postprocessor, to review results at
selected points in the model over time. Mainly used for transient
and nonlinear analyses. (Not discussed in this course.)

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Stress Analysis - Postprocessing
...Reviewing Results Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Reviewing results of a stress analysis generally involves:
– Deformed shape
– Stresses
– Reaction forces

TO ANSYS
Deformed Shape

ANSYS 10.0-
• Gives a quick indication of whether the loads were applied in
the correct direction.
• Legend column shows the maximum displacement, DMX.

10.0
10.0-- Part
• You can also animate the deformation.

Part 1
1
Stress Analysis - Postprocessing
...Reviewing Results Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• To plot the deformed
shape:
– General Postproc > Plot
Results > Deformed Shape
– Or use the PLDISP
command.

TO ANSYS
• For animation:

ANSYS 10.0-
– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls >
Animate > Deformed Shape
– Or use the ANDISP

10.0
10.0-- Part
command.

Part 1
1
Stress Analysis - Postprocessing
...Reviewing Results Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Stresses
• The following stresses are typically available for a 3-D solid
model:
– Component stresses — SX, SY, SZ, SXY, SYZ, SXZ (global
Cartesian directions by default)
– Principal stresses — S1, S2, S3, SEQV (von Mises), SINT (stress

TO ANSYS
intensity)

ANSYS 10.0-
• Best viewed as contour plots, which allow you to quickly
locate “hot spots” or trouble regions.
– Nodal solution: Stresses are averaged at the nodes, showing

10.0
10.0-- Part
smooth, continuous contours.
– Element solution: No averaging, resulting in discontinuous

Part 1
contours.

1
Stress Analysis - Postprocessing
...Reviewing Results Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• To plot stress contours:
– General Postproc > Define/Modify > Nodal Results or PLNSOL command
– General Postproc > Define/Modify > Element Results or PLESOL command

• You can also animate stress contours:


– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Animate > Deformed Results... or ANCNTR
command

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Stress Analysis - Postprocessing
...Reviewing Results Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
A Note on PowerGraphics
• It is the default graphics setting (/GRAPH,POWER).
• Plots only the visible surfaces and ignores
everything “underneath.”
• Advantages:
– Faster replot, crisp graphics.

TO ANSYS
– Smooth, almost photo-realistic displays.

ANSYS 10.0-
– Prevents stress averaging across material and real
constant boundaries.

• To deactivate PowerGraphics (or activate “full

10.0
10.0-- Part
graphics”):
– Toolbar > POWERGRPH

Part 1
– Or issue /GRAPH,FULL.

1
Stress Analysis - Postprocessing
...Reviewing Results Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Reaction Forces
• The sum of the reaction forces in each direction must equal
the sum of applied loads in that direction.
• Best viewed as a listing:
– PRRSOL command

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Stress Analysis - Postprocessing
...Reviewing Results Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Preprocessing
 Geometry
 Meshing

• Solution
 Loading

TO ANSYS
 Solve

ANSYS 10.0-
• Postprocessing
 Review results
– Check validity of solution

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Stress Analysis - Postprocessing
G. Checking Validity of Solution Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• It is always a good idea to do a “sanity check” and make sure
that the solution is acceptable.
• What you need to check depends on the type of problem you
are solving, but here are some typical questions to ask:
Do the reaction forces balance the applied loads?

TO ANSYS
Where is the maximum stress located?

ANSYS 10.0-
– If it is at a singularity, such as a point load or a re-entrant corner,
the value is generally meaningless. (We will discuss more about
this in Chapter 5.)

10.0
10.0-- Part
Are the stress values beyond the elastic limit?
– If so, the load magnitudes may be wrong, or you may need to do

Part 1
a nonlinear analysis.

1
Stress Analysis - Postprocessing
...Checking Validity of Solution Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Is the mesh adequate?
– This is always debatable, but you can gain confidence in the
mesh by using error estimation data (discussed in Chapter 14).
– Other ways to check mesh adequacy:
• Plot the element solution (unaveraged stresses) and look for
elements with high stress gradients. These regions are
candidates for mesh refinement.

TO ANSYS
• If there is a significant difference between the nodal

ANSYS 10.0-
(averaged) and element (unaveraged) stress contours, the
mesh may be too coarse.
• Similarly, if there is a significant difference between

10.0
10.0-- Part
PowerGraphics and full graphics stresses, the mesh may be
too coarse.

Part 1
• Re-mesh with twice as many elements, re-solve, and compare
the results. (But this may not always be practical.)

1
Stress Analysis - Solution
…Solve Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Demo:
– Continue rib problem...
– Plot deformed shape and animate it
– Plot SX and SEQV contours. Animate one of them.
– List reaction forces. Total FY reaction should be 100*2*1/8 = 25.
– Plot unaveraged SX and compare with averaged SX

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Stress Analysis Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Preprocessing
 Geometry
 Meshing

• Solution
 Loading

TO ANSYS
 Solve

ANSYS 10.0-
• Postprocessing
 Review results
 Check validity of solution

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Stress Analysis
H. Workshop Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• This workshop consists of two problems:
2A. Lathe Cutter

Refer to your Workshop Supplement for instructions.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION ANSYS 10.0-
TO ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0-- Part 1
Training Manual

5. Preliminary Decisions
Preliminary Decisions
Overview Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Before starting an analysis in ANSYS, you need to make a
few decisions, such as the analysis type needed and the type
of model you want to build.
• In this chapter, we will discuss some of the decision making
process. The purpose is to give you an idea of the amount of
planning generally needed before “jumping in” to do the
analysis.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
• Topics covered:
– A. Which analysis type?
– B. What to model?

10.0
10.0-- Part
– C. Which element type?

Part 1
1
Preliminary Decisions
A. Which analysis type? Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• The analysis type usually belongs to one of the following
disciplines:
Structural Motion of solid bodies, pressure on solid bodies,
or contact of solid bodies
Thermal Applied heat, high temperatures, or changes in
temperature

TO ANSYS
Electromagnetic Devices subjected to electric currents (AC or
DC), electromagnetic waves, and voltage or

ANSYS 10.0-
charge excitation
Fluid Motion of gases/fluids, or contained gases/fluids
Coupled-Field Combinations of any of the above

10.0
10.0-- Part
• We will focus on structural analyses in this discussion.

Part 1
1
Preliminary Decisions
...Which analysis type? Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Once you choose a structural analysis, the next questions
are:
– Static or dynamic analysis?
– Linear or nonlinear analysis?

• To answer these, remember that whenever a body is


subjected to some excitation (loading), it responds with three

TO ANSYS
types of forces:

ANSYS 10.0-
– static forces (due to stiffness)
– inertia forces (due to mass)
– damping forces

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Preliminary Decisions
...Which analysis type? Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Static vs. Dynamic Analysis
• A static analysis assumes that only the stiffness forces are
significant.
• A dynamic analysis takes into account all three types of
forces.

TO ANSYS
• For example, consider the analysis of a diving
board.

ANSYS 10.0-
– If the diver is standing still, it might be sufficient to
do a static analysis.

10.0
10.0-- Part
– But if the diver is jumping up and down, you will
need to do a dynamic analysis.

Part 1
1
Preliminary Decisions
...Which analysis type? Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Inertia and damping forces are usually significant if the
applied loads vary rapidly with time.
• Therefore you can use time-dependency of loads as a way to
choose between static and dynamic analysis.
– If the loading is constant over a relatively long period of time,
choose a static analysis.

TO ANSYS
– Otherwise, choose a dynamic analysis.

ANSYS 10.0-
• In general, if the excitation frequency is less than 1/3 of the
structure’s lowest natural frequency, a static analysis may be
acceptable.

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Preliminary Decisions
...Which analysis type? Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Linear vs. Nonlinear Analysis
• A linear analysis assumes that the loading causes negligible
changes to the stiffness of the structure. Typical
characteristics are:
– Small deflections
– Strains and stresses within the elastic limit

TO ANSYS
– No abrupt changes in stiffness such as two bodies coming into

ANSYS 10.0-
and out of contact

Stress

10.0
10.0-- Part
Elastic modulus
(EX)

Part 1
Strain

1
Preliminary Decisions
...Which analysis type? Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• A nonlinear analysis is needed if the loading causes
significant changes in the structure’s stiffness. Typical
reasons for stiffness to change significantly are:
– Strains beyond the elastic limit (plasticity)
– Large deflections, such as with a loaded fishing rod
– Contact between two bodies

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
Stress

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
Strain

1
Preliminary Decisions
B. What to Model? Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Many modeling decisions must be made before building an
analysis model:
– How much detail should be included?
– Does symmetry apply?
– Will the model contain stress singularities?

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Preliminary Decisions
...What to Model? Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Details
• Small details that are unimportant to the analysis should not
be included in the analysis model. You can suppress such
features before sending a model to ANSYS from a CAD
system.
• For some structures, however, "small" details such as fillets

TO ANSYS
or holes can be locations of maximum stress and might be

ANSYS 10.0-
quite important, depending on your analysis objectives.

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Preliminary Decisions
...What to Model? Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Symmetry
• Many structures are symmetric in some form and allow only a
representative portion or cross-section to be modeled.
• The main advantages of using a symmetric model are:
– It is generally easier to create the model.

TO ANSYS
– It allows you to make a finer, more detailed model and thereby
obtain better results than would have been possible with the full

ANSYS 10.0-
model.

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Preliminary Decisions
...What to Model? Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• To take advantage of symmetry, all of the following must be
symmetric:
– Geometry
– Material properties
– Loading conditions

• There are different types of symmetry:

TO ANSYS
– Axisymmetry

ANSYS 10.0-
– Rotational
– Planar or reflective

10.0
10.0-- Part
– Repetitive or translational

Part 1
1
Preliminary Decisions
...What to Model? Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Axisymmetry
• Symmetry about a central axis, such as in light bulbs, straight
pipes, cones, circular plates, and domes.
• Plane of symmetry is the cross-section anywhere around the
structure. Thus you are using a single 2-D “slice” to
represent 360° — a real savings in model size!

TO ANSYS
• Loading is also assumed to be

ANSYS 10.0-
axisymmetric in most cases.
However, if it is not, and if the
analysis is linear, the loads can be

10.0
10.0-- Part
separated into harmonic
components for independent

Part 1
solutions that can be superposed.

1
Preliminary Decisions
...What to Model? Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Rotational symmetry
• Repeated segments arranged about a central axis, such as in
turbine rotors.
• Only one segment of the structure needs to be modeled.
• Loading is also assumed to be symmetric about the axis.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Preliminary Decisions
...What to Model? Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Planar or reflective symmetry
• One half of the structure is a mirror image of the other half.
The mirror is the plane of symmetry.
• Loading may be symmetric or anti-symmetric about the plane
of symmetry.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
This model illustrates
both reflective and

10.0
10.0-- Part
rotational symmetry

Part 1
1
Preliminary Decisions
...What to Model? Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Repetitive or translational symmetry
• Repeated segments arranged along a straight line, such as a
long pipe with evenly spaced cooling fins.
• Loading is also assumed to be “repeated” along the length of
the model.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
This model illustrates both repetitive and reflective symmetry.

1
Preliminary Decisions
...What to Model? Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• In some cases, only a few minor details will disrupt a
structure's symmetry. You may be able to ignore such
details (or treat them as being symmetric) in order to gain the
benefits of using a smaller model. How much accuracy is
lost as the result of such a compromise might be difficult to
estimate.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Preliminary Decisions
...What to Model? Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Stress singularities
• A stress singularity is a location in a finite element model
where the stress value is unbounded (infinite). Examples:
– A point load, such as an applied force or moment
– An isolated constraint point, where the reaction force behaves
like a point load

TO ANSYS
– A sharp re-entrant corner (with zero fillet radius)

ANSYS 10.0-
• As the mesh density is refined at P σ = P/A
a stress singularity, the stress value As A ⇒ 0, σ ⇒ ∞
increases and never converges.

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Preliminary Decisions
...What to Model? Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Real structures do not contain stress singularities. They are
a fiction created by the simplifying assumptions of the model.
• So how do you deal with stress singularities?
– If they are located far away from the region of interest, you can
simply ignore them by deactivating the affected zone while
reviewing results.

TO ANSYS
– If they are located in the region of interest, you will need to take
corrective action, such as:

ANSYS 10.0-
• adding a fillet at re-entrant corners and redoing the analysis.
• replacing a point force with an equivalent pressure load.

10.0
10.0-- Part
• “spreading out” displacement constraints over a set of
nodes.

Part 1
1
Preliminary Decisions
C. Which Element Type? Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• This is an important decision you usually need to make
before beginning the analysis.
• Typical issues are:
– Which element category? Solid, shell, beam, etc.
– Element order. Linear or quadratic.
– Mesh density. Usually determined by the objectives of the

TO ANSYS
analysis.

ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Preliminary Decisions
...Which Element Type? Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Element category
• ANSYS offers many different categories of elements. Some
of the commonly used ones are:
– Line elements
– Shells
– 2-D solids

TO ANSYS
– 3-D solids

ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Preliminary Decisions
...Which Element Type? Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Line elements:
– Beam elements are used to model bolts, tubular members, C-
sections, angle irons, or any long, slender members where only
membrane and bending stresses are needed.
– Spar elements are used to model springs, bolts, preloaded bolts,
and truss members.
– Spring elements are used to model springs, bolts, or long

TO ANSYS
slender parts, or to replace complex parts by equivalent

ANSYS 10.0-
stiffnesses.

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Preliminary Decisions
...Which Element Type? Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Shell elements:
– Used to model thin panels or curved surfaces.
– The definition of “thin” depends on the application, but as a
general guideline, the major dimensions of the shell structure
(panel) should be at least 10 times its thickness.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Preliminary Decisions
...Which Element Type? Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• 2-D Solid elements:
– Used to model a cross-section of solid objects.
– Must be modeled in the global Cartesian X-Y plane.
– All loads are in the X-Y plane, and the response (displacements)
are also in the X-Y plane.
– Element behaviour may be one of the following:

TO ANSYS
• plane stress

ANSYS 10.0-
• plane strain
• axisymmetric
• axisymmetric harmonic

10.0
Y

10.0-- Part
Z X

Part 1
1
Preliminary Decisions
...Which Element Type? Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Plane stress assumes zero stress
in the Z direction.
– Valid for components in which the
Y
Z dimension is smaller than the X
and Y dimensions.
Z X
– Z-strain is non-zero.

TO ANSYS
– Optional thickness (Z direction)
allowed.

ANSYS 10.0-
– Used for structures such as flat
plates subjected to in-plane
loading, or thin disks under

10.0
10.0-- Part
pressure or centrifugal loading.

Part 1
1
Preliminary Decisions
...Which Element Type? Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Plane strain assumes zero strain in the Z
direction.
– Valid for components in which the Z
dimension is much larger than the X and Y
dimensions.
Z
– Z-stress is non-zero.

TO ANSYS
– Used for long, constant-cross-section Y
X
structures such as structural beams.

ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Preliminary Decisions
...Which Element Type? Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Axisymmetry assumes that the 3-D model
and its loading can be generated by revolving
a 2-D section 360° about the Y axis.
– Axis of symmetry must coincide with the
global Y axis.
– Negative X coordinates are not permitted.

TO ANSYS
– Y direction is axial, X direction is radial, and Z
direction is circumferential (hoop) direction.

ANSYS 10.0-
– Hoop displacement is zero; hoop strains and
stresses are usually very significant.

10.0
– Used for pressure vessels, straight pipes,

10.0-- Part
shafts, etc.

Part 1
1
Preliminary Decisions
...Which Element Type? Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Axisymmetric harmonic is a special case of axisymmetry
where the loads can be non-axisymmetric.
– The non-axisymmetric loading decomposed into Fourier series
components, applied and solved separately, and then combined
later. No approximation is introduced by this simplification!
– Used for non-axisymmetric loads such as torque on a shaft.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Preliminary Decisions
...Which Element Type? Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• 3-D Solid elements:
– Used for structures which, because of geometry, materials,
loading, or detail of required results, cannot be modeled with
simpler elements.
– Also used when the model geometry is transferred from a 3-D
CAD system, and a large amount of time and effort is required to
convert it to a 2-D or shell form.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Preliminary Decisions
...Which Element Type? Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Element Order
• Element order refers to the polynomial order of the element’s
shape functions.
• What is a shape function?
– It is a mathematical function that gives the “shape” of the results
within the element. Since FEA solves for DOF values only at

TO ANSYS
nodes, we need the shape function to map the nodal DOF values

ANSYS 10.0-
to points within the element.
– The shape function represents assumed behavior for a given
element.

10.0
10.0-- Part
– How well each assumed element shape function matches the
true behavior directly affects the accuracy of the solution, as

Part 1
shown on the next slide.

1
Preliminary Decisions
...Which Element Type? Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Linear approximation
(Poor Results)
Quadratic distribution of
DOF values
Actual quadratic
curve

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
Linear approximation
with multiple elements Quadratic approximation

10.0
10.0-- Part
(Better Results) (Best Results)

Part 1
1
Preliminary Decisions
...Which Element Type? Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• When you choose an element type, you are implicitly
choosing and accepting the element shape function assumed
for that element type. Therefore, check the shape function
information before you choose an element type.
• Typically, a linear element has only corner nodes, where as a
quadratic element also has midside nodes.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Preliminary Decisions
...Which Element Type? Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Linear elements Quadratic elements
• Can support only a linear variation • Can support a quadratic variation
of displacement and therefore of displacement and therefore a
(mostly) only a constant state of linear variation of stress within a
stress within a single element. single element.
• Highly sensitive to element • Can represent curved edges and
distortion. surfaces more accurately than

TO ANSYS
linear elements. Not as sensitive
• Acceptable if you are only to element distortion.
interested in nominal stress

ANSYS 10.0-
results. • Recommended if you are
interested in highly accurate
• Need to use a large number of stresses.
elements to resolve high stress

10.0
10.0-- Part
gradients. • Give better results than linear
elements, in many cases with
fewer number of elements and

Part 1
total DOF.

1
Preliminary Decisions
...Which Element Type? Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Notes:
– For shell models, the difference between linear and quadratic
elements is not as dramatic as for solid models. Linear shells
are therefore usually preferred.
– Besides linear and quadratic elements, a third kind is available,
known as p-elements. P-elements can support anywhere from a
quadratic to an 8th-order variation of displacement within a

TO ANSYS
single element and include automatic solution convergence
controls.

ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Preliminary Decisions
...Which Element Type? Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Mesh Density
• The fundamental premise of FEA is that as the number of
elements (mesh density) is increased, the solution gets
closer and closer to the true solution.
• However, solution time and computer resources required
also increase dramatically as you increase the number of

TO ANSYS
elements.

ANSYS 10.0-
• The objectives of the analysis usually decide which way the
slider bar below should be moved.

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Preliminary Decisions
...Which Element Type? Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• If you are interested in highly accurate stresses:
– A fine mesh will be needed, omitting no geometric details at any
location in the structure where such accuracy is needed.
– Stress convergence should be demonstrated.
– Any simplification anywhere in the model might introduce
significant error.

TO ANSYS
• If you are interested in deflections or nominal stresses:

ANSYS 10.0-
– A relatively coarse mesh is sufficient.
– Small geometry details may be omitted.

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Preliminary Decisions
...Which Element Type? Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• If you are interested in mode shapes (modal analysis):
– Small details can usually be omitted.
– Simple mode shapes can be captured using a relatively coarse
mesh.
– Complex mode shapes may require a uniform, moderately fine
mesh.

TO ANSYS
• Thermal Analyses:

ANSYS 10.0-
– Small details can usually be omitted, but since many thermal
analyses are followed by a stress analysis, stress
considerations generally determine this.

10.0
10.0-- Part
– Mesh density is usually determined by expected thermal
gradients. A fine mesh is required for high thermal gradients,
where as a coarse mesh may be sufficient for low gradients.

Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0 -- Part 1
Training Manual

6. Thermal Analysis
Thermal Analysis Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• In this chapter, we will briefly describe the procedure to do a
steady-state thermal analysis.
• The purpose is two-fold:
– To reiterate the typical analysis steps that were introduced in
Chapter 4.
– To introduce you to thermal loads and boundary conditions.

TO ANSYS
• Topics covered:

ANSYS 10.0
A. Overview
B. Procedure

10.0 -- Part
C. Workshop

Part 1
1
Thermal Analysis
A. Overview Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Thermal analyses are used to determine the temperature
distribution, thermal gradient, heat flow, and other such
thermal quantities in a structure.
• A thermal analysis can be steady-state or transient.
– Steady-state implies that the loading conditions have “settled
down” to a steady level, with little or no time dependency.

TO ANSYS
Example: An iron that has already reached the desired
temperature setting.

ANSYS 10.0
– Transient* implies conditions that are changing with time.
Example: A casting in the process of cooling down from molten
metal to solid.

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
* Not covered in this course

1
Thermal Analysis
...Overview Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Thermal loading conditions can be:
Temperatures Regions of the model where temperatures are known.
Convections Surfaces where heat is transferred to (or from)
surroundings by means of convection. Input consists
of film coefficient h and bulk temperature of the
surrounding fluid Tb.
Heat flux* Surfaces where the heat flow rate per unit area is

TO ANSYS
known.
Heat flow* Points where the heat flow rate is known.

ANSYS 10.0
Heat generation* Regions where the volumetric heat generation rate is
known.
Radiation* Surfaces where heat transfer occurs by means of

10.0 -- Part
radiation. Input consists of emissivity, Stefan-
Boltzmann constant, and optionally, temperature at a
“space node.”

Part 1
Adiabatic surfaces “Perfectly insulated” surfaces where no heat transfer
takes place.

1
* Not covered in this course
Thermal Analysis
B. Procedure Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• The procedure to do a steady-state thermal analysis is similar
to that for a static stress analysis:
– Preprocessing
• Geometry
• Meshing
– Solution

TO ANSYS
• Loading

ANSYS 10.0
• Solve
– Postprocessing
• Review results

10.0 -- Part
• Validate the solution

• Setting GUI preferences (Main Menu > Preferences) to thermal

Part 1
may be helpful.

1
Thermal Analysis - Procedure
Preprocessing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Geometry
• Can either be created within ANSYS or imported.
• Details of both methods will be covered later.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Thermal Analysis - Procedure
...Preprocessing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Meshing
• First define element attributes: element type, real constants,
and material properties.
Element type
– The table below shows commonly used thermal element types.

TO ANSYS
– There is only one DOF per node: TEMP.

ANSYS 10.0
Commonly used thermal element types
2-D Solid 3-D Solid 3-D Shell Line Elements

10.0 -- Part
Linear PLANE55 „ SOLID70 „ SHELL57 „ LINK31,32,33,34
PLANE77 „ SOLID90 „
Quadratic

Part 1
PLANE35 Œ SOLID87 Œ

1
Thermal Analysis - Procedure
...Preprocessing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Material properties
– Minimum requirement is thermal conductivity, KXX.
– Specific heat (C) will be needed if internal heat generation is to
be applied.
– ANSYS-supplied material library (/ansys56/matlib) contains both
structural and thermal properties for a few common materials,
but we recommend that you create and use your own material

TO ANSYS
library.

ANSYS 10.0
Real constants
– Mainly needed for shell and line elements.

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Thermal Analysis - Procedure
...Preprocessing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Then mesh the geometry.
– Save the database.
– Use the MeshTool to create the mesh. The default smart-size
level of 6 produces a good initial mesh.

• This completes the preprocessing step. Solution is next.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Thermal Analysis - Procedure
Solution Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Loading
• Prescribed Temperatures
– DOF constraints for a thermal analysis
– Solution > Define Loads > Apply > Temperature
– Or the D family of commands (DA, DL, D)

TO ANSYS
• Convections

ANSYS 10.0
– These are surface loads
– Solution > Define Loads > Apply > Convection
– Or the SF family of commands (SFA, SFL, SF, SFE)

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Thermal Analysis - Procedure
...Solution Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Adiabatic Surfaces
– “Perfectly insulated” surfaces where no heat transfer takes
place.
– This is the default condition, i.e, any surface with no boundary
conditions specified is automatically treated as an adiabatic
surface.

TO ANSYS
• Other possible thermal loads:

ANSYS 10.0
– heat flux
– heat flow
– heat generation

10.0 -- Part
– radiation

Part 1
1
Thermal Analysis - Procedure
...Solution Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Solve
• First save the database.
• Then issue SOLVE or click on Solution > -Solve- Current LS.
– Results are written to the results file, jobname.rth, as well as to
the in-memory database.

TO ANSYS
• This completes the solution step. Postprocessing is next.

ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Thermal Analysis - Procedure
Postprocessing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Review Results
• Typically consists of contour plots of temperature, thermal
gradient, and thermal flux.
– General Postproc > Plot Results > Nodal Solu… (or Element Solu…)
– Or use PLNSOL (or PLESOL)

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Thermal Analysis - Procedure
...Postprocessing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• A useful option for contour plots in 3-D solid models is
isosurfaces — surfaces of constant value. Use the /CTYPE
command or Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Style > Contours >
Contour Style.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Thermal Analysis - Procedure
...Postprocessing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Validate the Solution
Are temperatures within the expected range?
– You can generally guess the expected range based on
prescribed temperatures and convection boundaries.

Is the mesh adequate?

TO ANSYS
– Just as in the case of stresses, you can plot the unaveraged
thermal gradients (element solution) and look for elements with

ANSYS 10.0
high gradients. These regions are candidates for mesh
refinement.
– If there is a significant difference between the nodal (averaged)

10.0 -- Part
and element (unaveraged) thermal gradients, the mesh may be
too coarse.

Part 1
1
Thermal Analysis - Procedure
C. Workshop Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Refer to your Workshop Supplement for instructions on:
W3. Axisymmetric Pipe with Fins

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0 -- Part 1
Training Manual

7. Thermal-Stress Analysis
Thermal-Stress Analysis Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• In this chapter, we will briefly describe how to do a thermal-
stress analysis.
• The purpose is two-fold:
– To show you how to apply thermal loads in a stress analysis.
– To introduce you to a coupled-field analysis.

TO ANSYS
• Topics covered:

ANSYS 10.0-
A. Overview
B. Procedure
C. Workshop

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Thermal-Stress Analysis
A. Overview Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Thermally Induced Stress
• When a structure is heated or cooled, it
deforms by expanding or contracting.
Thermal stresses
• If the deformation is somehow restricted due to constraints
— by displacement constraints or an
opposing pressure, for example —

TO ANSYS
thermal stresses are induced in the

ANSYS 10.0-
structure.
• Another cause of thermal stresses is
Thermal stresses
non-uniform deformation, due to different

10.0
10.0-- Part
due to different
materials (i.e, different coefficients of materials
thermal expansion).

Part 1
1
Thermal-Stress Analysis
B. Procedure Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Thermal-stress analysis involves two sequential analyses:
1. First do a steady-state (or transient)
thermal analysis.
• Model with thermal elements. Thermal
Analysis
• Apply thermal loading.
• Solve and review results. jobname.rth

TO ANSYS
2. Then do a static structural analysis.

ANSYS 10.0-
• Switch element types to structural. Temperatures
• Define structural material properties,
including thermal expansion Structural

10.0
10.0-- Part
coefficient. Analysis
• Apply structural loading, including
jobname.rst

Part 1
temperatures from thermal analysis.
• Solve and review results.

1
Thermal-Stress Analysis
...Procedure Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
1. Thermal Analysis
– The procedure for this is described in Chapter 6.

2. Structural Analysis
a) Move to PREP7 and switch element types from thermal to
structural.
• Preprocessor > Element Type > Switch Elem Type

TO ANSYS
• Or ETCHG command

ANSYS 10.0-
Caution: Switching element types will reset all element options
back to their default settings. For example, if you used 2-D
axisymmetric elements in the thermal analysis, you may need to

10.0
10.0-- Part
respecify the axisymmetric option after the switch. Therefore,
be sure to verify and set the proper element options:

Part 1
• Preprocessor > Element Type > Add/Edit/Delete > [Options]
• Or use ETLIST and KEYOPT commands

1
Thermal-Stress Analysis
...Procedure Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
b) Define structural material properties (EX, etc.), including the
coefficient of thermal expansion (ALPX). (If you use the ANSYS-
supplied material library, both thermal and structural properties
will be defined, so this step may not be needed.)
Note: If ALPX is not defined or set to zero, no thermal strains
will be calculated. You can use this technique to “turn off”
temperature effects!

TO ANSYS
c) Specify static analysis type. This step is needed only if the
thermal analysis was a transient.

ANSYS 10.0-
• Solution > Analysis Type > New Analysis
• Or ANTYPE command

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Thermal-Stress Analysis
...Procedure Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
d) Apply structural loads and include temperatures as part of the
loading.
• Solution > Define Loads > Apply > Structural > Temperature >
From Therm Analy
• Or use the LDREAD command.
e) Solve.

TO ANSYS
f) Review stress results.

ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Thermal-Stress Analysis
C. Workshop Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Refer to your Workshop Supplement for instructions on:
W4. Axisymmetric Pipe with Fins

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0 -- Part 1
Training Manual

8. Importing Geometry
Importing Geometry
Overview Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• If the geometry of the part you want to analyze has already
been created in a CAD package, it is generally more efficient
to import it into ANSYS than to re-create it.
• In this chapter, we will discuss the various import options
available in ANSYS:
A. IGES Imports — expands on IGES importing, which was covered

TO ANSYS
briefly in Chapter 4.

ANSYS 10.0
B. Connection Products — shows how to import parts directly from
certain CAD packages.
C. F.E. Model Imports — briefly explains how to import nodes and

10.0 -- Part
elements.
D. Workshop — a hands-on exercise on importing.

Part 1
1
Importing Geometry
A. IGES Imports Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• The general procedure to import an IGES file has already
been discussed in Chapter 4. In this section, we will explore
some of the options available:
– the two methods, default and alternate
– the Merge, Solid, and Small options

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Importing Geometry
...IGES Imports Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Default Method — Imports and stores geometry in a
special database that allows you to repair and
defeature the model. [ioptn,iges,defa]
+ Ability to defeature, i.e, to remove minor details such
as protrusions, cavities, and small holes.
– Because of the special database used to store
geometry, only a limited number of solid model

TO ANSYS
operations are available.

ANSYS 10.0
– Generally requires more memory and is somewhat
slower than alternate method.

Even though this method is currently the default, it is

10.0 -- Part
NOT recommended because its disadvantages
outweigh the advantages.

Part 1
1
Importing Geometry
...IGES Imports Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Alternate Method — Imports and stores geometry in the
standard ANSYS database. [ioptn,iges,alte]
+ Faster and more reliable than the default method.
+ Allows the full set of solid model operations.
– No defeaturing tools are available.

This is the recommended method.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Importing Geometry
...IGES Imports Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Merge Option
– ON by default, to merge coincident entities so that adjacent
areas meet at a common line, and adjacent lines meet at a
common keypoint.
– Turn it OFF only if you are using the default method and your
initial attempt runs out of memory.
– ioptn,merge,on/off

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
merge

Part 1
1
Importing Geometry
...IGES Imports Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Solid Option
– ON by default, to automatically create a volume (solid) after
importing and merging.
– Turn it OFF if you want to import surfaces only and create a shell
or 2-D plane model.
– ioptn,solid,on/off

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Importing Geometry
...IGES Imports Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Small Option
– ON by default, to automatically delete small, sliver-like areas that
might be troublesome for meshing.
– Available only for the "default" method.
– Turn it OFF if you find gaps or “holes” in the model.
– ioptn,small,on/off

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Importing Geometry
B. Connection Products Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• IGES importing works quite well, but because of the dual
translation process — CAD ⌫ IGES ⌫ ANSYS — there are
many cases where it does not work.
• ANSYS Connection products overcome this problem by
directly reading the “native” part files produced by the CAD
package:

TO ANSYS
– Connection for Pro/ENGINEER (“Pro/E” for short)

ANSYS 10.0
– Connection for Unigraphics (“UG” for short)
– Connection for CADDS
– Connection for SAT

10.0 -- Part
– Connection for Parasolid

• To use a connection product, you need to purchase the

Part 1
appropriate license.

1
Importing Geometry
...Connection Products Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Connection for Pro/E
– Reads .prt file produced by Pro/ENGINEER (from Parametric
Technology Corp.).
– Requires Pro/ENGINEER software.
– Utility Menu > File > Import > Pro/E...
– Or ~proein

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Importing Geometry
...Connection Products Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Connection for UG
– Reads .prt file produced by Unigraphics (from Electronic Data
Systems Corp.).
– Requires Unigraphics software.
– Utility Menu > File > Import > UG...
– Or ~ugin

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Importing Geometry
...Connection Products Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Connection for CATIA
– Reads _pd file produced by CATIA
– Utility Menu > File > Import > CATIA...

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Importing Geometry
...Connection Products Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Connection for SAT
– Reads .sat file produced by CAD packages that use the ACIS
modeler.
– Does not require ACIS software.
– Utility Menu > File > Import > SAT...
– Or ~satin

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Importing Geometry
...Connection Products Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Connection for Parasolid
– Reads .x_t or .xmt_txt file produced by CAD packages that use
the Parasolid modeler.
– Does not require Parasolid software.
– Utility Menu > File > Import > PARA...
– Or ~parain

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Importing Geometry
C. F.E. Model Imports Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• In addition to solid model geometry, ANSYS can also import
finite element model data (nodes and elements) from certain
packages.
• The most common approach is for the software vendor to
“write out” the nodes and elements in a format that ANSYS
can read (using NREAD and EREAD). This format is

TO ANSYS
published in the ANSYS Programmer’s Manual.

ANSYS 10.0
• Some software packages, such as FEMAP from Enterprise
Software Products Inc., provide an interface that allows you
to transfer more than just nodes and elements.

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Importing Geometry
D. Workshop Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Refer to your Workshop Supplement for instructions on:
W5. Importing Geometry

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0 -- Part 1
Training Manual

9. Solid Modeling
Solid Modeling
Overview Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Importing geometry is convenient, but sometimes you may
need to create it in ANSYS. Some possible reasons:
– You may need to build a parametric model — one defined in
terms of variables for later use in design optimization or
sensitivity studies.
– The geometry may not be available in “importable” format.

TO ANSYS
– The Connection product you need may not be available on your
computer platform.

ANSYS 10.0
• ANSYS has an extensive set of geometry creation tools,
which we will discuss in this chapter.

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Solid Modeling
...Overview Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Topics covered:
A. Definitions
B. Top-Down Modeling
• Primitives
• Working Plane
• Boolean Operations

TO ANSYS
C. Workshop

ANSYS 10.0
D. Bottom-Up Modeling
• Keypoints
• Coordinate Systems

10.0 -- Part
• Lines, Areas, Volumes
• Operations

Part 1
E. Workshop

1
Solid Modeling
Definitions Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Solid Modeling can be defined as the process of
creating solid models.
• Let’s review some earlier definitions: Volumes

– A solid model is defined by volumes, areas, lines,


and keypoints.
– Volumes are bounded by areas, areas by lines, Areas

TO ANSYS
and lines by keypoints.

ANSYS 10.0
– Hierarchy of entities from low to high: keypoints Lines &
⌫ lines ⌫ areas ⌫ volumes. You cannot delete Keypoints
an entity if a higher-order entity is attached to it.

10.0 -- Part
• Also, a model with just areas and below, such as Volumes

a shell or 2-D plane model, is still considered a Areas

solid model in ANSYS terminology. Lines

Part 1
Keypoints

1
Solid Modeling
...Definitions Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• There are two approaches to creating a solid model:
– Top-down
– Bottom-up

• Top-down modeling starts with a definition of volumes (or


areas), which are then combined in some fashion to create
the final shape.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
add

Part 1
1
Solid Modeling
...Definitions Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Bottom-up modeling starts with keypoints, from which you
“build up” lines, areas, etc.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
• You may choose whichever approach best suits the shape of
the model, and also freely combine both methods.

10.0 -- Part
• We will now discuss each modeling approach in detail.

Part 1
1
Solid Modeling
B. Top-Down Modeling Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Top-down modeling starts with a definition of volumes (or
areas), which are then combined in some fashion to create
the final shape.
– The volumes or areas that you initially define are called
primitives.
– Primitives are located and oriented with the help of the working
plane.

TO ANSYS
– The combinations used to produce the final shape are called

ANSYS 10.0
Boolean operations.

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Solid Modeling - Top-Down Modeling
Primitives Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Primitives are predefined geometric shapes such as circles,
polygons, and spheres.
• 2-D primitives include rectangles, circles, triangles, and other
polygons.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Solid Modeling - Top-Down Modeling
...Primitives Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• 3-D primitives include blocks, cylinders, prisms, spheres, and
cones.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Solid Modeling - Top-Down Modeling
...Primitives Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• When you create a 2-D primitive, ANSYS defines an area,
along with its underlying lines and keypoints.
• When you create a 3-D primitive, ANSYS defines a volume,
along with its underlying areas, lines and keypoints.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Solid Modeling - Top-Down Modeling
...Primitives Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• You can create primitives by specifying their dimensions or
by picking locations in the graphics window.
– For example, to create a solid circle:
• Preprocessor > -Modeling- Create > Areas > Circle > Solid Circle

Instructions

TO ANSYS
By picking
Picker

ANSYS 10.0
Pick the center and radius
in graphics window...

10.0 -- Part
...Or enter values here

Part 1
1
Solid Modeling - Top-Down Modeling
...Primitives Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
– To create a block:
• Preprocessor > -Modeling > Create > Volumes > Block >

Instructions

By picking

TO ANSYS
Pick the desired locations
Picker in graphics window...

ANSYS 10.0
...Or enter values here

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Solid Modeling - Top-Down Modeling
Working Plane Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• The “WP” in the prompts and in the picker stands for
Working Plane — a movable, 2-D reference plane used to
locate and orient primitives.
– By default, the WP origin coincides with the global origin, but
you can move it and/or rotate it to any desired position.
– By displaying a grid, you can use the WP as a “drawing tablet.”

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
he
WY ig
ht
WY

10.0 -- Part
WX

th
id
X1

w
Y2

Part 1
X2
Y1
WP (X,Y)
WX

1
Solid Modeling - Top-Down Modeling
...Working Plane Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• All working plane controls are in Utility
Menu > WorkPlane.
• The WP Settings menu controls the
following:
– WP display - triad only (default), grid only,
or both.

TO ANSYS
– Snap - allows you to pick locations on the

ANSYS 10.0
WP easily by “snapping” the cursor to the
nearest grid point.
– Grid spacing - the distance between grid
lines.

10.0 -- Part
– Grid size - how much of the (infinite)
working plane is displayed.

Part 1
1
Solid Modeling - Top-Down Modeling
...Working Plane Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• You can move the working
plane to any desired position
using the Offset and Align
menus.
– Offset WP by Increments…
• Use the push buttons (with
increment set by slider).

TO ANSYS
• Or type in the desired

ANSYS 10.0
increments.
• Or use dynamic mode
(similar to pan-zoom-

10.0 -- Part
rotate).

Part 1
1
Solid Modeling - Top-Down Modeling
...Working Plane Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
– Offset WP to >
This simply “translates” the WP,
maintaining its current orientation,
to the desired destination, which
can be:
• Existing keypoint(s). Picking
multiple keypoints moves WP to

TO ANSYS
their average location.

ANSYS 10.0
• Existing node(s).
• Coordinate location(s).
• Global origin.

10.0 -- Part
• Origin of the active coordinate
system (discussed later).

Part 1
1
Solid Modeling - Top-Down Modeling
...Working Plane Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
– Align WP with >
This reorients the WP.
• For example, Align WP with
Keypoints prompts you to pick 3
keypoints - one at the origin, one
to define the X-axis, and one to
define the X-Y plane.

TO ANSYS
• To return the WP to its default

ANSYS 10.0
position (at global origin, on
global X-Y plane), click on Align
WP with > Global Cartesian.

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Solid Modeling - Top-Down Modeling
...Working Plane Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Demo:
– Clear the database
– Display WP and create a few keypoints by picking. Note the coordinates
displayed in the picker.
– Turn on the grid, change spacing, and activate snap.
– Create more keypoints. Note how the cursor snaps to grid points.
– Define 2 rectangles — one by picking corners and one by dimensions.

TO ANSYS
– Now offset WP to average of a few keypoints, then rotate in-plane by 30º.

ANSYS 10.0
– Define 2 more rectangles by picking and by dimensions. Note the
change in rectangle orientation.
– Align WP with global origin, then define some 3-D primitives. Use

10.0 -- Part
picking as well as “By dimensions.”

Part 1
1
Solid Modeling - Top-Down Modeling
Boolean Operations Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Boolean operations are computations involving combinations
of geometric entities. ANSYS Boolean operations include
add, subtract, intersect, divide, glue, and overlap.
• The “input” to Boolean operations can be any geometric
entity, ranging from simple primitives to complicated
volumes imported from a CAD system.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
add

Part 1
Input entities Boolean operation Output entity(ies)

1
Solid Modeling - Top-Down Modeling
...Boolean Operations Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• All Boolean operations are available in the GUI under
Preprocessor > Modeling > Operate.
• By default, input entities of a Boolean operation are deleted
after the operation.
• Deleted entity numbers become “free” (i.e., they will be
assigned to a new entity created, starting with the lowest

TO ANSYS
available number).

ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Solid Modeling - Top-Down Modeling
...Boolean Operations Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Add
– Combines two or more entities into one.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Solid Modeling - Top-Down Modeling
...Boolean Operations Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Glue
– Attaches two or more entities by creating a common boundary
between them.
– Useful when you want to maintain the distinction between
entities (such as for different materials).

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Solid Modeling - Top-Down Modeling
...Boolean Operations Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Overlap
– Same as glue, except that the input entities overlap each other.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Solid Modeling - Top-Down Modeling
...Boolean Operations Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Subtract
– Removes the overlapping portion of one or more entities from a
set of “base” entities.
– Useful for creating holes or trimming off portions of an entity.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Solid Modeling - Top-Down Modeling
...Boolean Operations Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Divide
– Cuts an entity into two or more pieces that are still connected to
each other by common boundaries.
– The “cutting tool” may be the working plane, an area, a line, or
even a volume.
– Useful for “slicing and dicing” a complicated volume into
simpler volumes for brick meshing.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Solid Modeling - Top-Down Modeling
...Boolean Operations Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Intersect
– Keeps only the overlapping portion of two or more entities.
– If there are more than two input entities, you have two choices:
common intersection and pairwise intersection
• Common intersection finds the common overlapping region
among all input entities.

TO ANSYS
• Pairwise intersection finds the overlapping region for each
pair of entities and may produce more than one output entity.

ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
Common Pairwise
intersection intersection

1
Solid Modeling - Top-Down Modeling
...Boolean Operations Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Partition
– Cuts two or more intersecting entities into multiple pieces that
are still connected to each other by common boundaries.
– Useful, for example, to find the intersection point of two lines
and still retain all four line segments, as shown below. (An
intersection operation would return the common keypoint and
delete both lines.)

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
L2 L6
L1 Partition L3

10.0 -- Part
L4
L5

Part 1
1
Solid Modeling - Top-Down Modeling
...Boolean Operations Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Demo:
– “Drill” a hole by subtracting a circle from a rectangle (or a
cylinder from a block)
– Create two overlapping entities, save db, and do the overlap
operation. Now resume db and add the entities. Note the
difference between the two operations. (Glue is similar to
overlap.)

TO ANSYS
– Interesting model:

ANSYS 10.0
• block,-2,2, 0,2, -2,2
• sphere,2.5,2.7
• vinv,all ! intersection

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Solid Modeling - Top-Down Modeling
C. Workshop Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Refer to your Workshop Supplement for instructions on:
W6. Pillow Block

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Solid Modeling
D. Bottom-Up Modeling Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Bottom-up modeling begins with a definition of keypoints,
from which other entities are “built up.”
• To build an L-shaped object, for example, you could start by
defining the corner keypoints as shown below. You can then
create the area by simply “connecting the dots” or by first
defining lines and then defining the area by lines.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Solid Modeling - Bottom-Up Modeling
Keypoints Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• To define keypoints:
– Preprocessor > Modeling > Create >
Keypoints
– Or use the K family of commands: K,
KFILL, KNODE, etc.

• The only data needed to create a keypoint is the keypoint

TO ANSYS
number and the coordinate location.

ANSYS 10.0
– Keypoint number defaults to the next available number.
– The coordinate location may be provided by simply picking
locations on the working plane or by entering the X,Y,Z values.

10.0 -- Part
How are the X,Y,Z values interpreted? It depends on the active
coordinate system.

Part 1
1
Solid Modeling - Bottom-Up Modeling
Coordinate Systems Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Active Coordinate System
• Defaults to global Cartesian.
• Use CSYS command (or Utility
Menu > WorkPlane > Change Active
CS to) to change it to
– global Cartesian [csys,0]

TO ANSYS
– global cylindrical [csys,1]

ANSYS 10.0
– global spherical [csys,2]
– working plane [csys,4]

10.0 -- Part
– or a user-defined local coordinate
system [csys, n]

Part 1
Each of these systems is
explained next.

1
Solid Modeling - Bottom-Up Modeling
...Coordinate Systems Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Global Coordinate System
• The global reference system for the model.
• May be Cartesian (system 0), cylindrical (1), or spherical (2).
– For example, location (0,10,0) in global Cartesian is the same as
(10,90,0) in global Cylindrical.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Solid Modeling - Bottom-Up Modeling
...Coordinate Systems Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Local Coordinate System
• A user-defined system at a desired location, with
ID number 11 or greater. The location may be:
– At WP origin [CSWP]
– At specified coordinates [LOCAL]
– At existing keypoints [CSKP] or nodes [CS]

TO ANSYS
• May be Cartesian, cylindrical, or spherical.

ANSYS 10.0
• May be rotated about X, Y, Z axes.

10.0 -- Part
Y12
Y X12

Part 1
Y11
X11

1
X
Solid Modeling - Bottom-Up Modeling
...Coordinate Systems Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Working Plane Coordinate System
• Attached to the working plane.
• Used mainly to locate and orient solid model primitives.
• You can also use the working plane to define keypoints by
picking.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Solid Modeling - Bottom-Up Modeling
...Coordinate Systems Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• You can define any number of
coordinate systems, but only one
may be active at any given time.
• Several geometry items are
affected by the coordinate system
[CSYS] that is active at the time
they are defined:

TO ANSYS
– Keypoint and node locations

ANSYS 10.0
– Line curvature
– Area curvature
– Generation and “filling” of

10.0 -- Part
keypoints and nodes
– Etc.

Part 1
• The graphics window title shows
the active system.

1
Solid Modeling - Bottom-Up Modeling
Lines Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• There are many ways to create lines, as shown here.
• If you define areas or volumes, ANSYS will automatically
generate any undefined lines, with the curvature determined
by the active CS.
• Keypoints must be available in order to create lines.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Solid Modeling - Bottom-Up Modeling
Areas Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Creating areas using bottom-up method requires keypoints
or lines to be already defined.
• If you define volumes, ANSYS will automatically generate any
undefined areas and lines, with the curvature determined by
the active CS.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Solid Modeling - Bottom-Up Modeling
Volumes Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Creating volumes using bottom-up method requires
keypoints or lines or areas to be already defined.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Solid Modeling
Bottom-Up Modeling Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Demo:
– Clear the database
– Create 5 keypoints at (1,2), (3,2), (4,0), (1,1.5), (2.5,0)
– Switch to CSYS,1 and create a line “in active CS” between KP4 &
KP5
– Switch back to CSYS,0 and create an area “through KPs.”

TO ANSYS
Notice that the remaining lines were automatically generated
lines, all of them straight.

ANSYS 10.0
– Define two circles:
• 0.3R, centered at (2.25,1.5)

10.0 -- Part
• 0.35R, centered at (3.0,0.6)
– Subtract the two circles from base area. (We have used a
combination of bottom-up and top-down modeling.)

Part 1
– Save as r.db

1
Solid Modeling - Bottom-Up Modeling
Operations Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Boolean operations are available for entities created by both
top-down and bottom-up modeling approaches.
• Besides Booleans, many other operations are available:
– Extrude
– Scale
– Move

TO ANSYS
– Copy

ANSYS 10.0
– Reflect
– Merge

10.0 -- Part
– Fillet

Part 1
1
Solid Modeling - Bottom-Up Modeling
...Operations Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Extrude
• To quickly create volumes from existing areas (or
areas from lines, and lines from keypoints).
• If the area is meshed, you can extrude the
elements along with the areas.
• Four ways to extrude areas:

TO ANSYS
– Along normal — creates volume by normal offset of

ANSYS 10.0
areas [VOFFST] .
– By XYZ offset — creates volume by a general x-y-z
offset [VEXT]. Allows tapered extrusion.

10.0 -- Part
– About axis — creates volume by revolving areas
about an axis (specified by two keypoints) [VROTAT].
– Along lines — creates volume by “dragging” areas

Part 1
along a line or a set of contiguous lines [VDRAG].

1
Solid Modeling - Bottom-Up Modeling
...Operations Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Scale
• Useful for conversion from one units system to another.
• Discussed in Chapter 4.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Solid Modeling - Bottom-Up Modeling
...Operations Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Move
• To translate or rotate an entity by
specifying DX,DY,DZ offsets.
– DX,DY,DZ are interpreted in the
active CS.
– To translate an entity, make the Transfer
active CS Cartesian. Rotate from csys,0

TO ANSYS
-30° to csys,11
– To rotate an entity, make the

ANSYS 10.0
active CS cylindrical or spherical.

• Another option is to transfer


coordinates to a different system.

10.0 -- Part
– Transfer occurs from the active
CS to a specified CS.
– This operation is useful when you

Part 1
need to move and rotate an entity
at the same time.

1
Solid Modeling - Bottom-Up Modeling
...Operations Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Copy
• To generate multiple copies of an
entity.
• Specify the number of copies and
the DX,DY,DZ offset for each copy.
Copy in
DX,DY,DZ are interpreted in the local
active CS.

TO ANSYS
cylindrical
CS
• Useful to create multiple holes,

ANSYS 10.0
ribs, protrusions, etc.

10.0 -- Part
Create outer
areas by

Part 1
skinning

1
Solid Modeling - Bottom-Up Modeling
...Operations Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Reflect
• To reflect entities about a plane.
• Specify the direction of reflection:
– X for reflection about the YZ plane
– Y for XZ plane

TO ANSYS
– Z for XY plane

ANSYS 10.0
All directions are interpreted in the
active CS, which must be a
Cartesian system.

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
What is the direction of
reflection in this case?

1
Solid Modeling - Bottom-Up Modeling
...Operations Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Merge
• To attach two entities together by removing coincident
keypoints.
– Merging keypoints will automatically merge coincident higher-
order entities, if any.

• Usually required after a reflect, copy, or other operation that

TO ANSYS
causes coincident entities.

ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Reflect Merge or glue
required

Part 1
1
Solid Modeling - Bottom-Up Modeling
...Operations Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Fillet
• Line fillet requires two intersecting lines with
a common keypoint at the intersection.
– If the common keypoint does not exist, do a
partition operation first.
– ANSYS does not update the underlying area (if
any), so you need to either add or subtract the

TO ANSYS
fillet region.
Create

ANSYS 10.0
• Area filleting is similar. fillet

10.0 -- Part
Subtract from Create

Part 1
base area area

1
Solid Modeling - Bottom-Up Modeling
...Operations Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Demo:
– Resume r.db (if necessary)
– Create two keypoints for the axis, at (0,0) and (0,1), then extrude the area
by revolving about the axis 60º
– Resume r.db
– Make copies of the rib radially about the Y-axis:
• Create a local cylindrical CS at global origin, with THYZ = -90

TO ANSYS
• Generate 7 total copies (6 new ones) with DY=15

ANSYS 10.0
– Create the three outer “skin” areas using ASKIN,P
– Resume r.db
– Create a 0.5R fillet between the top and right lines. (Notice that the lines

10.0 -- Part
attached to the area have been modified. This is allowed in some cases.)
– Create the triangular fillet area by lines (AL,P), then subtract it from the
main area.

Part 1
1
Solid Modeling - Bottom-Up Modeling
E. Workshop Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Refer to your Workshop Supplement for instructions on:
W7. Connecting Rod

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0 -- Part 1
Training Manual

10. Meshing
Meshing
Overview Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Recall that meshing is a three-step procedure:
– Define element attributes
– Specify mesh controls
– Generate the mesh

• In this chapter, we will expand on each of these steps and


also discuss additional meshing options.

TO ANSYS
• Topics covered:

ANSYS 10.0
A. Multiple Element Attributes E. Hex-to-Tet Meshing
B. Controlling Mesh Density F. Mesh Extrusion

10.0 -- Part
C. Changing a Mesh G. Sweep Meshing
D. Mapped Meshing H. Workshop

Part 1
1
Meshing
A. Multiple Element Attributes Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• As we discussed earlier, every element has the following attributes
associated with it:
– Element type (TYPE)
– Real constants (REAL)
– Material properties (MAT)

• Most FEA models have multiple attributes. For example, the silo

TO ANSYS
shown here has two element types, three real constant sets, and two
materials.

ANSYS 10.0
TYPE 1 = shell
TYPE 2 = beam MAT 1 = concrete
MAT 2 = steel

10.0 -- Part
REAL 1 = 3/8” thickness

Part 1
REAL 2 = beam properties
REAL 3 = 1/8” thickness

1
Meshing
...Multiple Element Attributes Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Whenever you have multiple TYPEs, REALs and MATs, you
need to make sure that each element is assigned the proper
attributes. There are three ways to do this:
– Assign attributes to the solid model entities before meshing
– Activate a “global” setting of MAT, TYPE, and REAL before
meshing

TO ANSYS
– Modify element attributes after meshing

ANSYS 10.0
• If no assignments are made, ANSYS uses default settings of
MAT=1, TYPE=1, and REAL=1 for all elements in the model.

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Meshing
...Multiple Element Attributes Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Assigning Attributes to the Solid Model
1. Define all necessary element types, materials,
and real constant sets.
2. Then use the “Element Attributes” section of
the MeshTool (Preprocessor > MeshTool):
– Choose entity type and press the SET button.

TO ANSYS
– Pick the entities to which you want to assign
attributes.

ANSYS 10.0
– Set the appropriate attributes in the subsequent
dialog box.

Or select the desired entities and use the

10.0 -- Part
VATT, AATT, LATT, or KATT command.
3. When you mesh an entity, its attributes are

Part 1
automatically transferred to the elements.

1
Meshing
...Multiple Element Attributes Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Using Global Attribute Settings
1. Define all necessary element types,
materials, and real constant sets.
2. Then use the “Element Attributes”
section of the MeshTool (Preprocessor >
MeshTool):

TO ANSYS
– Choose Global and press the SET button.
– Activate the desired combination of

ANSYS 10.0
attributes in the “Meshing Attributes”
dialog box. We refer to these as the
active TYPE, REAL, and MAT settings.

10.0 -- Part
Or use the TYPE, REAL, and MAT
commands.

Part 1
3. Mesh only those entities to which the
above settings apply.

1
Meshing
...Multiple Element Attributes Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Modifying Element Attributes
1. Define all necessary element types, materials, and real constant
sets.
2. Activate the desired combination of TYPE, REAL, and MAT settings:
– Main Menu>Preprocessor>Modeling>Move / Modify>Elements>Modify Attrib
Or use the TYPE, REAL, and MAT commands

TO ANSYS
3. Modify the attributes of only those elements to which the above

ANSYS 10.0
settings apply:
– Issue EMODIF,PICK or choose Preprocessor > Modeling >Move/Modify >
Elements > Modify Attrib

10.0 -- Part
– Then pick the desired elements

4. In the subsequent dialog box,

Part 1
set attributes to “All to current.”

1
Meshing
...Multiple Element Attributes Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Some points to keep in mind:
• You can verify element attributes by activating
attribute numbering:
– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Numbering
– Or /PNUM,attr,ON, where attr may be TYPE, MAT,
or REAL

TO ANSYS
• Element attributes assigned directly to solid model entities will
override the default attribute pointers.

ANSYS 10.0
• By assigning attributes to solid model entities, you can avoid having
to reset attributes in the middle of meshing operations. This is
advantageous because ANSYS meshing algorithms are most

10.0 -- Part
efficient when meshing all entities at once.
• Clearing a solid model entity of its mesh will not delete attribute

Part 1
assignments.

1
Meshing
...Multiple Element Attributes Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Demo:
– Resume ribgeom.db
– List element types, real constants, and materials. One of each
has been defined.
– Bring up MeshTool, choose area attributes, and press Set
– Pick the single area, show the Area Attributes dialog box, and

TO ANSYS
press OK. (There is only one set of attributes, but this illustrates
the general procedure.)

ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Meshing
B. Controlling Mesh Density Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• ANSYS provides many tools to control mesh density, both on
a global and local level:
– Global controls
• SmartSizing
• Global element sizing
• Default sizing

TO ANSYS
– Local controls

ANSYS 10.0
• Keypoint sizing
• Line sizing
• Area sizing

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Meshing
...Controlling Mesh Density Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
SmartSizing
• Determines element sizes by assigning divisions on all lines,
taking into account curvature of the line, its proximity to
holes and other features, and element order.
• SmartSizing is off by default, but is recommended for free
meshing. It does not affect mapped meshing. (Free meshing

TO ANSYS
vs. mapped meshing will be discussed later.)

ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Meshing
...Controlling Mesh Density Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• To use SmartSizing:
– Bring up the MeshTool (Preprocessor > MeshTool),
turn on SmartSizing, and set the desired size level.
• Or use SMRT,level
• Size level ranges from 1 (very fine) to 10 (very
coarse). Defaults to 6.

TO ANSYS
– Then mesh all volumes (or all areas) at once, rather
than one-by-one.

ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Meshing
...Controlling Mesh Density Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Examples of different SmartSize
levels are shown here for a
tetrahedron mesh.
• Advanced SmartSize controls,
such as mesh expansion and
transition factors, are available
on the SMRT command (or

TO ANSYS
Preprocessor > Meshing >Size
Cntrls > SmartSize> Adv Opts)

ANSYS 10.0
• You can turn off SmartSizing
using the MeshTool or by
issuing smrt,off.

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Meshing
...Controlling Mesh Density Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Global Element Sizing
• Allows you to specify a maximum element edge length
for the entire model (or number of divisions per line):
– ESIZE,SIZE
– or Preprocessor > Meshing >MeshTool > “Size Controls -
Globl” [Set]
– or Preprocessor > Meshing> Size Cntrls >Manual Size >

TO ANSYS
Global > Size

ANSYS 10.0
• Can be used by itself or in conjunction with
SmartSizing.

10.0 -- Part
– Using ESIZE by itself (SmartSizing off) will result in a
uniform element size throughout the volume (or area)
being meshed.

Part 1
– With SmartSizing on, ESIZE acts as a “guide,” but the
specified size may be overridden to accommodate line
curvature or proximity to features.

1
Meshing
...Controlling Mesh Density Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Default Sizing
• If you don’t specify any controls,
ANSYS uses default sizing, which
assigns minimum and maximum line
divisions, aspect ratio, etc. based on
element order.

TO ANSYS
• Meant for mapped meshing, but is also

ANSYS 10.0
used for free meshing if SmartSizing is
off.
• You can adjust default size

10.0 -- Part
specifications using DESIZE or
Preprocessor > Meshing > Size Cntrls

Part 1
>Manual Size >Global> Other.

1
Meshing
...Controlling Mesh Density Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Keypoint Sizing
• Controls element size at keypoints:
– Preprocessor > Meshing >MeshTool > “Size Controls:
Keypt” [Set]
– or KESIZE command
– or Preprocessor > Meshing> Size Cntrls > Manual Size>

TO ANSYS
Keypoints

ANSYS 10.0
Different keypoints can have different KESIZEs,
giving you more control over the mesh.
• Useful for stress concentration regions.

10.0 -- Part
• Specified sizes may be overridden by SmartSizing
to accommodate line curvature or proximity to

Part 1
features.

1
Meshing
...Controlling Mesh Density Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Line Sizing
• Controls element size at lines:
– Preprocessor > Meshing > MeshTool > Size Controls: Lines
[Set]
– or LESIZE command
– or Preprocessor > Meshing > Size Cntrls > Manual Size>Lines Yes for
“soft”
Different lines can have different LESIZEs. No for

TO ANSYS
“hard”
• Size specifications may be “hard” or “soft.”

ANSYS 10.0
– “Hard” sizes are always honored by the mesher, even if
SmartSizing is on. They take precedence over all other
size controls.
– “Soft” sizes may be overridden by SmartSizing.

10.0 -- Part
• You can also specify a spacing ratio — ratio of last
division to first. Used to bias the divisions towards

Part 1
one end or towards the middle.

1
Meshing
...Controlling Mesh Density Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Area Sizing
• Controls element size in the interior of areas:
– Preprocessor > Meshing >MeshTool > “Size Controls:
Areas” [Set]
– or AESIZE command
– or Preprocessor > Meshing > Size Cntrls > Manual

TO ANSYS
Size>Areas

ANSYS 10.0
Different areas can have different AESIZEs.
• Bounding lines will use the specified size only if they
have no LESIZE or KESIZE specified and if no

10.0 -- Part
adjacent area has a smaller size.
• Specified sizes may be overridden by SmartSizing to

Part 1
accommodate line curvature or proximity to features.

1
Meshing
...Controlling Mesh Density Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Demo:
– Resume ribgeom.db
– Mesh with SMRT,6. (Not a very good mesh)
– Re-mesh with SMRT,3 (good mesh)
– Set ESIZE to 0.2 and re-mesh. The mesh becomes coarse even
though SMRT is set to 3, because the smart-mesher takes ESIZE

TO ANSYS
into account. Also note that the element sizes are not uniform
(because SMRT is on).

ANSYS 10.0
– Turn off SMRT and re-mesh. Element sizes are now uniform.

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Meshing
C. Changing a Mesh Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• If a mesh is not acceptable, you can always re-mesh
the model by following these steps:
1. Clear the mesh.
• The clear operation is the opposite of mesh: it
removes nodes and elements.
• Use the [Clear] button on the MeshTool, or use
VCLEAR, ACLEAR, etc.

TO ANSYS
(If you are using the MeshTool, you may skip this step

ANSYS 10.0
since the program will prompt you whether to clear or
not when you execute step 3.)
2. Specify new or different mesh controls.

10.0 -- Part
3. Mesh again.

Part 1
1
Meshing
...Changing a Mesh Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Another meshing option is to refine the
mesh in specific regions.
– Available for all area elements and only
tetrahedral volume elements.
– Easiest way is to use the MeshTool:
• First save the database.
• Then choose how you want to specify

TO ANSYS
the region of refinement — at nodes,
elements, keypoints, lines, or areas —

ANSYS 10.0
and press the Refine button.
• Pick the entities at which you want the
mesh to be refined. (Not required if you

10.0 -- Part
choose “All Elems.”)
• Finally, choose the level of refinement.
Level 1 (minimal refinement) is a good

Part 1
starting point.

1
Meshing
...Changing a Mesh Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Demo:
– Continuing the last demo… (ribgeom has been meshed with
ESIZE = 0.2)
– Choose refinement at Lines and press Refine
– Pick the top line, then choose the default “minimal refinement”
– (The refinement takes about 1-2 minutes.)

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Meshing
D. Mapped Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• There are two main meshing methods: free and
mapped.
• Free Mesh
– Has no element shape restrictions.
– The mesh does not follow any pattern.
– Suitable for complex shaped areas and volumes.

TO ANSYS
• Mapped Mesh

ANSYS 10.0
– Restricts element shapes to quadrilaterals for
areas and hexahedra (bricks) for volumes.

10.0 -- Part
– Typically has a regular pattern with obvious rows
of elements.

Part 1
– Suitable only for “regular” areas and volumes
such as rectangles and bricks.

1
Meshing
...Mapped Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Free Mesh Mapped Mesh
+ Easy to create; no need to + Generally contains a lower
divide complex shapes into number of elements.
regular shapes.
+ Lower-order elements may be
– Volume meshes can contain acceptable, so the number of
only tetrahedra, resulting in a DOF is lower.
large number of elements.

TO ANSYS
+ Aesthetically pleasing.
– Only higher-order (10-node)

ANSYS 10.0
tetrahedral elements are – Areas and volumes must be
acceptable, so the number of “regular” in shape, and mesh
DOF can be very high. divisions must meet certain

10.0 -- Part
criteria.
– Very difficult to achieve,
especially for complex shaped

Part 1
volumes.

1
Meshing
...Mapped Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Creating a Free Mesh
• Free meshing is the default setting for both area
and volume meshes.
• Create a free mesh is easy:
– Bring up the MeshTool and verify that free meshing
is set.

TO ANSYS
– SmartSizing is generally recommended for free
meshing, so activate it and specify a size level.

ANSYS 10.0
Save the database.
– Then initiate the mesh by pressing the Mesh button.
• Press [Pick All] in the picker to choose all

10.0 -- Part
entities (recommended).
– Or use the commands VMESH,ALL or AMESH,ALL.

Part 1
1
Meshing
...Mapped Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Creating a Mapped Mesh
• This is not as easy as free meshing because the areas and
volumes have to meet certain requirements:
– Area must contain either 3 or 4 lines (triangle or quadrilateral).
– Volume must contain either 4, 5, or 6 areas (tetrahedron,
triangular prism, or hexahedron).

TO ANSYS
– Element divisions on opposite sides must match.

ANSYS 10.0
• For triangular areas or tetrahedral volumes, the number of
element divisions must be even.

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Meshing
...Mapped Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• For quadrilateral areas or hexahedral volumes, unequal
divisions are allowed, as shown in these examples, but the
number of divisions must satisfy a formula (shown on the
next page).

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0 -- Part 1
Training Manual
...Mapped Meshing
Meshing
Meshing
...Mapped Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Thus mapped meshing involves a three-step procedure:
– Ensure “regular” shapes, i.e, areas with 3 or 4 sides, or volumes
with 4, 5, or 6 sides.
– Specify size and shape controls
– Generate the mesh

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Meshing
...Mapped Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Ensure regular shapes
• In most cases, the model geometry is such that the areas
have more than 4 sides, and volumes have more that 6 sides.
To convert these to regular shapes, you may need to do one
or both of these operations:
– Slice the areas (or volumes) into smaller, simpler shapes.

TO ANSYS
– Concatenate two or more lines (or areas) to reduce the total

ANSYS 10.0
number of sides.

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Meshing
...Mapped Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Slicing can be accomplished with the Boolean divide
operation.
– Remember that you can use the working plane, an area, or a line
as the slicing tool.
– Sometimes, it may be easier to create a new line or a new area
than to move and orient the working plane in the correct
direction.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Meshing
...Mapped Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Concatenation creates a new line that is a combination of two
or more lines, thereby reducing the number of lines making
up the area.
– Use the LCCAT command or Preprocessor > Meshing >
Concatenate > Lines, then pick the lines to be concatenated.
– For area concatenation, use ACCAT command or Preprocessor >
Meshing > Concatenate > Areas

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
Concatenating

10.0 -- Part
these two lines
makes this a
4-sided area

Part 1
1
Meshing
...Mapped Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• You can also imply a concatenation by simply
identifying the three or four corners of the area. In
this case, ANSYS internally generates the
concatenation.
– To do this, choose Quad shape and Map mesh in the
MeshTool.
– Then change 3/4 sided to Pick cornrs.

TO ANSYS
– Press the Mesh button, pick the area, and then pick
the 3 or 4 corners that form the regular shape.

ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Meshing
...Mapped Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Notes on concatenation:
– It is purely a meshing operation and therefore should be the last step
before meshing, after all solid modeling operations. This is because the
output entity obtained from a concatenation cannot be used in any
subsequent solid modeling operation.
– You can "undo" a concatenation by deleting the line or area it produced.
– Concatenating areas (for mapped volume meshing) is generally much

TO ANSYS
more complicated because you may also need to concatenate some
lines. Lines are automatically concatenated only when two adjacent, 4-

ANSYS 10.0
sided areas are concatenated.
– Consider the add (Boolean) operation if the lines or areas meet at a
tangent.

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Meshing
...Mapped Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Specify size and shape controls
• This is the second step of the three-step mapped
meshing procedure.
• Choosing the shape is simple. In the MeshTool,
choose Quad for area meshing, and Hex for volume
meshing, then click on Map.

TO ANSYS
• Commonly used size controls and the order in which
they are applied:

ANSYS 10.0
– Line sizing [LESIZE] is always honored.
– Global element size , if specified, will be applied to
“unsized” lines.

10.0 -- Part
– Default element sizing [DESIZE] will be applied to
unsized lines only if ESIZE is not specified.

Part 1
– (SmartSizing is not valid.)

1
Meshing
...Mapped Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• If you specify line divisions, remember that:
– divisions on opposite sides must match, but you only need to
specify one side. The map mesher automatically transfers
divisions to the opposite side.
– if you have concatenated lines, divisions can only be applied to
the original (input) lines, not the composite line.

TO ANSYS
6 divisions specified on

ANSYS 10.0
each original line.

12 divisions will be
automatically applied to
this line (opposite to

10.0 -- Part
composite line).

How many divisions are

Part 1
used for the other two
lines? (Upcoming demo
will answer it.)

1
Meshing
...Mapped Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Generate the mapped mesh
• Once you have ensured regular shapes and assigned the
appropriate divisions, generating the mesh is easy. Just
press the Mesh button in the MeshTool, then press [Pick All]
in the picker or choose the desired entities.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Meshing
...Mapped Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Question: How would
you slice this model for
mapped meshing?

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
• Answer: It may not be worth

Part 1
the effort!

1
Meshing
...Mapped Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Demo:
– Resume ribfull.db
– Bring up MeshTool and apply 6 divisions to top and right lines
– Map-mesh the area using “Pick cornrs.” Notice that the left and
bottom lines get only two divisions each (from DESIZE).
– Now specify ESIZE,,4 (4 divisions per line) and re-mesh

TO ANSYS
– Finally, clear line divisions, specify ESIZE,0.1 (size), and re-mesh

ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Meshing
E. Hex-to-Tet Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• For volume meshing, we have only seen two
options so far:
– Free meshing, which creates an all-tet mesh.
This is easy to achieve but may not be desirable
in some cases because of the large number of
elements and total DOF created.
– Mapped meshing, which creates an all-hex

TO ANSYS
mesh. This is desirable but usually very difficult

ANSYS 10.0
to achieve.

• Hex-to-tet meshing provides a third option that


is the “best of both worlds.” It allows you to

10.0 -- Part
have a combination of hex and tet meshes
without compromising the integrity of the
mesh.

Part 1
1
Meshing
...Hex-to-Tet Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• This option works by creating pyramid-shaped elements in the
transition region between hex and tet regions.
– Requires the hex mesh to be available (or at least a quad mesh at the
shared area).
– The mesher first creates all tets, then combines and rearranges the tet
elements in the transition region to form pyramids.
– Available only for element types that support both pyramid and tet

TO ANSYS
shapes, e.g:
• Structural SOLID95, 186, VISCO89

ANSYS 10.0
• Thermal SOLID90
• Multiphysics SOLID62, 117, 122
– Results are good even in the transition

10.0 -- Part
region. Element faces are compatible
even when transitioning from a linear
hex element to a quadratic tet element.

Part 1
SOLID95

1
Meshing
...Hex-to-Tet Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
– Hex-to-tet meshing is valid for both quadratic-to-quadratic and linear-to-
quadratic transitions. Element type must support a 9-node pyramid for
the latter.

Hex Mesh Transition Layer Tet Mesh

Quadratic

TO ANSYS
to
Quadratic

ANSYS 10.0
20-Node Hex 13-Node Pyramid 10-Node Tet

10.0 -- Part
Linear
to
Quadratic

Part 1
8-Node Hex 9-Node Pyramid 10-Node Tet

1
Meshing
...Hex-to-Tet Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Procedure involves four steps:
1. Create the hex mesh.
– Start by map-meshing the regular-shaped volumes. (Or mesh
the shared areas with quads.)
– For stress analysis, use either an 8-node brick (SOLID45 or
SOLID185) or a 20-node brick (SOLID95 or SOLID186).

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Meshing
...Hex-to-Tet Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
2. Activate an element type that supports both pyramids and
tets.
– These are usually brick elements that can degenerate into
pyramids and tets. Check the Elements Manual, available on-
line, to find out which element types are valid.
– Examples:
• Structural SOLID95, 186, VISCO89

TO ANSYS
• Thermal SOLID90

ANSYS 10.0
• Multiphysics SOLID62, 117, 122

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Meshing
...Hex-to-Tet Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
3. Generate the tet mesh.
– First activate free meshing.
– Then mesh the volumes that are to be tet-meshed.

Pyramids are automatically generated at the interface.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Meshing
...Hex-to-Tet Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
4. Convert degenerate tets to true 10-node tets.
– The tet mesh created by the transition mesher consists of
degenerate elements — 10-node tetrahedra derived from 20-
node bricks, for example.
– These elements are not as efficient as true 10-node tets such as
SOLID92, which use less memory and write smaller files during
solution.

TO ANSYS
– To convert the degenerate tets into true tets:

ANSYS 10.0
• Preprocessor > Meshing> Modify Mesh > Change Tets...
• Or use the TCHG command.

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Meshing
...Hex-to-Tet Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Demo:
– Resume hextet.db
– Show element type list using Element Type > Add/Edit/Delete.
There are two element types: SOLID45 & 95
– Bring up MeshTool and set ESIZE,1 (size)
– Map-mesh the regular shaped volume

TO ANSYS
– Set element type to 2, and activate tet-meshing

ANSYS 10.0
– Free-mesh the other volume
– Convert degenerate tets to SOLID92
– Show element type list. There are now three element types.

10.0 -- Part
– Select elements of type 2 (SOLID95 pyramids) and plot elements

Part 1
1
Meshing
F. Mesh Extrusion Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• When you extrude an area into a volume, you can extrude the
area elements along with it, resulting in a meshed volume.
This is called mesh extrusion.
• Advantage: Easy to create a volume mesh with all bricks
(hexahedra) or a combination of bricks and prisms.
• Obvious requirement: Shape of the volume must lend itself

TO ANSYS
to extrusion.

ANSYS 10.0
Extrude

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Meshing
...Mesh Extrusion Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Procedure
1. Define two element types — an area
element and a volume element.
– Area element: Choose MESH200
quadrilaterals. MESH200 is a mesh-only
element and has no DOFs or material

TO ANSYS
properties associated with it.
– Volume element: Should be compatible

ANSYS 10.0
with the MESH200 element type. For
example, if you choose midside nodes for
MESH200, the 3-D solid element should

10.0 -- Part
also have midside nodes.
– ET command or Preprocessor > Element

Part 1
Type > Add/Edit/Delete

1
Meshing
...Mesh Extrusion Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
2. Mesh the area to be extruded with MESH200 elements.
– Use mapped or free meshing with desired mesh density.
– Preprocessor > MeshTool

3. Choose element extrusion options.


– EXTOPT command or Preprocessor >
Modeling >Operate > Extrude > Elem Ext
Opts

TO ANSYS
– Typical options are:

ANSYS 10.0
• Active TYPE attribute (should be 3-D
solid).
• Number of element divisions in the

10.0 -- Part
extrusion direction (i.e, number of
elements through the thickness).
Must be greater than zero; otherwise,

Part 1
only the area will be extruded, without
elements.

1
Meshing
...Mesh Extrusion Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
4. Extrude the area.
– First delete concatenated lines, if any. If concatenations are
present, ANSYS will not allow the extrusion operation.
• Preprocessor > Meshing> Concatenate > Del Concats > Lines
– Then extrude the area using any of the extrusion methods.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Meshing
...Mesh Extrusion Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Demo:
– Resume ribgeom.db
– Bring up the Element Types dialog, delete PLANE82 element
type, and replace it with MESH200 4-node quad
– Also add SOLID45 as element type 2
– Bring up MeshTool and set ESIZE,0.1

TO ANSYS
– Choose free quad-meshing and mesh the area

ANSYS 10.0
– Set extrusion options: TYPE=2, number of element divisions = 4
– Extrude area along normal with offset = 0.4
– Save the database to ribvol.db

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Meshing
G. Sweep Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Sweep meshing is yet another option available for volume
meshing. It is the process of meshing an existing volume by
sweeping an area mesh.
• Similar to mesh extrusion, except that the volume already
exists in this case (from a geometry import, for example).

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Meshing
...Sweep Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Advantages: Target surface
(1 area)
– Easy to create a volume mesh with all
bricks (hexahedra) or a combination of
bricks and prisms.
– Option to tet-mesh volumes that are
not “sweepable.” Transition pyramids Source surface
are automatically generated. (1 area)

TO ANSYS
• Requirements: Valid for sweep meshing

ANSYS 10.0
– Topology of the volume must be
consistent in the sweep direction.
Example: a block with a through hole
(ok even if the hole is tapered).

10.0 -- Part
– Source and target surfaces must be
single areas. Concatenated areas are
not allowed for either the source or the

Part 1
target.

Not valid for sweep meshing

1
Meshing
...Sweep Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Procedure
• Define and activate a 3-D hexahedral solid element
type, such as structural SOLID45 or SOLID95.
• Bring up MeshTool and choose Hex/Wedge and
Sweep.
• Choose how the source and target surfaces are

TO ANSYS
identified:

ANSYS 10.0
– “Auto Source/Target” means that ANSYS will
automatically choose them based on the volume’s
topology.
– “Pick Source/Target” means that you will be

10.0 -- Part
choosing them.

• Press the SWEEP button and follow prompt

Part 1
instructions from the picker. (Or use VSWEEP
command.)

1
Meshing
...Sweep Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Tet-Mesh Option
• A useful sweep option is to generate a
tet-mesh in non-sweepable volumes.
• To use this option:
– Make sure that the element type supports
degenerate pyramid and tetrahedron
shapes. Examples:

TO ANSYS
• Structural SOLID95, 186, VISCO89

ANSYS 10.0
• Thermal SOLID90
• Multiphysics SOLID62, 117, 122
– Choose Preprocessor > Meshing > Mesh >

10.0 -- Part
Volume Sweep> Sweep Opts and activate
the tet-mesh option. (Or use the
EXTOPT,VSWE command.)

Part 1
1
Meshing
...Sweep Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Notes
• To map-mesh a complex volume, you may need to slice it
several times and also do some area and line concatenations.
For sweep meshing, you typically need only a few slicing
operations, and no concatenations are needed!
• You can control the source area mesh using standard mesh

TO ANSYS
controls. SmartSizing is generally not recommended since it

ANSYS 10.0
is meant for free meshing.

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Meshing
...Sweep Meshing Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Demo:
– Resume ribvol.db
– Clear all volumes and all areas, then plot volumes
– Bring up MeshTool and activate sweep meshing
– Sweep mesh the volume

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Meshing
H. Workshop Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• This workshop consists of four exercises:
W8A. Pillow Block
W8B. Connecting Rod
W8C. Cotter Pin
W8D. Wheel

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0 -- Part 1
Training Manual

11. Select Logic


Select Logic
Overview Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Suppose you wanted to do the following:
– Plot all areas located in the second quadrant
– Delete all arcs of radius 0.2 to 0.3 units
– Apply a convection load on all exterior lines
– Write out all nodes at Z=3.5 to a file
– View results only in elements made of steel

TO ANSYS
The common “theme” in these tasks is that they all operate

ANSYS 10.0
on a subset of the model.
• Select Logic allows you to select a subset of entities and

10.0 -- Part
operate only on those entities.

Part 1
1
Select Logic
…Overview Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• The purpose of this chapter is to describe how to use select
logic and some of the options available. At the end of the
chapter, you should be able to:
– select subsets of the model
– operate only on the subsets
– define components

TO ANSYS
• Topics covered:

ANSYS 10.0
A. How to Use Select Logic
B. Components & Assemblies

10.0 -- Part
C. Workshop

Part 1
1
Select Logic
A. How to Use Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Three steps:
– Select a subset
– Perform operations on the subset
– Reactivate the full set

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Select subset

Operate on subset

Part 1
Reactivate full set

1
Select Logic
...How to Use Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Selecting Subsets
• Most selecting tools are Entity to select
available in the Select
Entities dialog box: Utility Criterion by
Menu > Select > Entities... which to select

• Or you can use the xSEL

TO ANSYS
family of commands:

ANSYS 10.0
KSEL, LSEL, ASEL, VSEL, Type of
NSEL, ESEL selection

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Select Logic
...How to Use Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Criterion by which to select:
– By Num/Pick: to select based on entity numbers or
by picking
– Attached to: to select based on attached entities.
For example, select all lines attached to the current
subset of areas.
– By Location: to select based on X,Y,Z location. For

TO ANSYS
example, select all nodes at X=2.5. X,Y,Z are

ANSYS 10.0
interpreted in the active coordinate system.
– By Attributes: to select based on material number,
real constant set number, etc. Different attributes

10.0 -- Part
are available for different entities.
– Exterior: to select entities lying on the exterior.

Part 1
– By Results: to select entities by results data, e.g,
nodal displacements.

1
Select Logic
...How to Use Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Type of selection
– From Full: selects a subset From Full
from the full set of entities.
– Reselect: selects (again) a Reselect
subset from the current subset.
– Also Select: adds another Also Select
subset to the current subset.

TO ANSYS
Unselect
– Unselect: deactivates a portion

ANSYS 10.0
of the current subset.
Invert
– Invert: toggles the active and
inactive subsets.

10.0 -- Part
Select None
– Select None: deactivates the
full set of entities.

Part 1
Select All
– Select All: reactivates the full
set of entities.

1
Select Logic
...How to Use Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Operations on the Subset
• Typical operations are applying loads, listing
results for the subset, or simply plotting the
selected entities.
– The advantage of having a subset selected is
that you can use the [Pick All] button when the

TO ANSYS
picker prompts you pick desired entities. Or you
can use the ALL label when using commands.

ANSYS 10.0
– Note that most operations in ANSYS, including
the SOLVE command, act on the currently
selected subset.

10.0 -- Part
• Another “operation” is to assign a name to the
selected subset by creating a component

Part 1
(discussed in the next section).

1
Select Logic
...How to Use Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Reactivating the Full Set
• After all desired operations are done on the selected subset,
you should reactivate the full set of entities.
– If all nodes and all elements are not active for solution, the
solver will issue a warning to that effect.

• The easiest way to reactivate the full set is to select

TO ANSYS
“everything”:

ANSYS 10.0
– Utility Menu > Select > Everything
– Or issue the command ALLSEL

10.0 -- Part
You can also use the [Sele All] button in the Select Entities
dialog box to reactivate each entity set separately. (Or issue
KSEL,ALL; LSEL,ALL; etc.)

Part 1
1
Select Logic
B. Components & Assemblies Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Components are named subsets. The name can then be used
in dialog boxes or commands in place of entity numbers or
the label ALL.
• A group of nodes, or elements, or keypoints, or lines, or
areas, or volumes can be defined as a component. Only one
entity type is associated with a component.

TO ANSYS
• Components can be selected or unselected. When you select

ANSYS 10.0
a component, you are actually selecting all of the entities in
that component.

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Select Logic
...Components & Assemblies Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• To create a component:
– First select the desired subset of entities.
– Then name the subset using the CM command or Utility Menu > Select >
Comp/Assembly > Create Component
• Up to 8 characters — letters, numbers, and _ (underscore) — are
allowed for the name.
• Suggestion: Use the first letter of the name to indicate the entity

TO ANSYS
type. For example, N_HOLES for a node component, E_ALUMIN for
an element comopnent, etc.

ANSYS 10.0
– Reactivate all entities.

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Select Logic
...Components & Assemblies Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Some useful options:
• Plot components
– Utility Menu > Plot > Components >
Selected Components
– Or CMPLOT

• Select, unselect, reselect, etc.

TO ANSYS
– Utility Menu > Select > Comp/Assembly >
Select Comp/Assembly

ANSYS 10.0
– Or CMSEL

• Listing components gives a list of currently defined and selected

10.0 -- Part
components.
– Utility Menu > Select > Comp/Assembly > List Comp/Assembly

Part 1
– Or CMLIST

1
Select Logic
...Components & Assemblies Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• An assembly is a group of components. An assembly can
also be made up of one or more other assemblies and/or
components.
• To create an assembly:
– Utility Menu > Select > Comp/Assembly
– Or use CMGRP

TO ANSYS
• You can nest assemblies up to 5 levels deep. For example,

ANSYS 10.0
an assembly named MOTOR may be “built up” from other
assemblies and components, as shown on the next page.

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Select Logic
...Components & Assemblies Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Components Assemblies Assembly

STATOR
STATASM
PERMMAG

TO ANSYS
ROTOR

ANSYS 10.0
ROTORASM MOTOR
WINDINGS

10.0 -- Part
AIRGAP

Part 1
1
Select Logic
C. Workshop Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• This workshop consists of two exercises:
W9A. Silo
W9B. Impeller

Refer to your Workshop Supplement for instructions.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0 -- Part 1
Training Manual

12. APDL Basics


APDL Basics
Overview Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• APDL is an acronym for ANSYS Parametric Design Language,
a powerful scripting language that allows you to parameterize
your model and automate common tasks.
• Using APDL, you can:
– input model dimensions, material properties, etc. in terms of
parameters rather than numbers.

TO ANSYS
– retrieve information from the ANSYS database, such as a node
location or maximum stress.

ANSYS 10.0-
– perform mathematical calculations among parameters, including
vector and matrix operations.

10.0
10.0-- Part
– define abbreviations (short cuts) for frequently used commands
or macros.

Part 1
– create a macro to execute a sequence of tasks, with if-then-else
branching, do-loops, and user prompts.

1
APDL Basics
...Overview Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• The purpose of this chapter is to introduce you to basic
APDL capabilities so that you are able to:
– define scalar parameters and use them
– retrieve information from the ANSYS database

• We will cover the following topics:


A. Defining Parameters

TO ANSYS
B. Using Parameters

ANSYS 10.0-
C. Retrieving Database Information
D. Workshop

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
APDL Basics
A. Defining Parameters Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• To define a parameter, use the format
Name=Value
– Can be typed in the input window or in the
Scalar Parameters dialog (Utility Menu >
Parameters > Scalar Parameters...)
– Name is the parameter name, eight

TO ANSYS
alphanumeric characters or less.

ANSYS 10.0-
– Value may be a number, a previously defined
parameter, a mathematical function, a
parametric expression, or a character string.

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
APDL Basics
...Defining Parameters Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Examples:
inrad=2.5 g=386
outrad=8.2 massdens=density/g
numholes=4 circumf=2*pi*rad
thick=outrad-inrad area=pi*r**2
e=2.7e6 dist=sqrt((y2-y1)**2+(x2-x1)**2)

TO ANSYS
density=0.283 slope=(y2-y1)/(x2-x1)

ANSYS 10.0-
bb=cos(30) theta=atan(slope)
pi=acos(-1) jobname=‘proj1’

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
APDL Basics
...Defining Parameters Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• The examples above are scalar parameters, which have a
single value — either numeric or character.
• ANSYS also supports array parameters, which have multiple
values. Both numeric and character arrays are available.
Array parameters will not be discussed in this course.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
28.7 job1
-9.2 job2
xvalues = -2.1 filnam = job3
51.0 job4

10.0
10.0-- Part
0.0 job5

Part 1
1
APDL Basics
...Defining Parameters Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Some naming rules:
• Parameter names must be eight characters or less, beginning
with a letter.
• Only letters, numbers, and the underscore character _ are
allowed.

TO ANSYS
• Avoid underscore _ as starting character… reserved for
ANSYS use.

ANSYS 10.0-
• Names are not case-sensitive, i.e, “RAD” and “Rad” are the
same. All parameters are internally stored in capital letters.

10.0
10.0-- Part
• Avoid common ANSYS labels such as STAT, DEFA, and ALL.

Part 1
1
APDL Basics
B. Using Parameters Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• To use a parameter, simply enter its name in the appropriate
field in the dialog box or on the command.
• For example, to define a rectangle using the parameters w=10
and h=5,
– you can use the menu:
Preprocessor > Modeling > Create > Area > Rectangle > By 2

TO ANSYS
Corners +
– or commands:

ANSYS 10.0-
/prep7
blc4,,,w,h

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
APDL Basics
...Using Parameters Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Note:
• Whenever you use parameters, ANSYS immediately
substitutes their values.
The rectangle in the previous example is stored as a 10x5
area, not as w x h. That is, if you change the value of w or h
after creating the rectangle, the area will NOT be updated.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
APDL Basics
...Using Parameters Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Other examples of using parameters:
jobname=‘proj1’
/filnam,jobname ! Jobname
/prep7
ex=30e6
mp,ex,1,ex ! Young’s modulus

TO ANSYS
force=500

ANSYS 10.0-
fk,2,fy,-force ! Force at KP 2
fk,6,fx,force/2 ! Force at KP 6

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
APDL Basics
C. Retrieving Database Information Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• To retrieve information from the database and assign it to a
parameter, use the *GET command or Utility Menu >
Parameters > Get Scalar Data...
• A vast amount of information is available, including model
and results data. Refer to the *GET command description for
details.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
APDL Basics
...Retrieving Database Information Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Examples:
*get,x1,node,1,loc,x ! x1 = X coordinate of node 1 [CSYS]*
/post1
*get,sx25,node,25,s,x ! sx25 = X stress at node 25 [RSYS]*
*get,uz44,node,44,u,z ! uz44 = UZ displacement at node 44 [RSYS]*
nsort,s,eqv ! Sort nodes by von Mises stress

TO ANSYS
*get,smax,sort,,max ! smax = maximum of last sort

ANSYS 10.0-
etable,vol,volu ! Store element volumes as vol
ssum ! Sum all element table columns

10.0
10.0-- Part
*get,totvol,ssum,,vol ! totvol = sum of vol column

Part 1
*CSYS = In the active coordinate system (CSYS)
RSYS = In the active results coordinate system (RSYS)

1
APDL Basics
...Retrieving Database Information Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Some data can be retrieved with a get function.
Examples:
x1=nx(1) ! x1 = X coordinate of node 1 [CSYS]*
nn=node(2.5,3,0) ! nn = node at or near (2.5,3,0) [CSYS]*
/post1

TO ANSYS
ux25=ux(25) ! ux25 = UX at node 25 [RSYS]*
temp93=temp(93) ! temp93 = temperature at node 93

ANSYS 10.0-
width=distnd(23,88) ! width = distance between nodes 23 & 88

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
*CSYS = In the active coordinate system (CSYS)
RSYS = In the active results coordinate system (RSYS)

1
APDL Basics
...Retrieving Database Information Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• You can use a get function directly in a field, just like a
parameter. For example:
k,10,kx(1),ky(3) ! KP 10 at X of KP 1, Y of KP 3 [CSYS]*
k,11,kx(1)*2,ky(3) ! [CSYS]*
f,node(2,2,0),fx,100 ! FX force at node(2,2,0) [CSYS]*

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
*CSYS = In the active coordinate system (CSYS)

1
APDL Basics Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Summary:
• Define parameters using the format Name=Value.
• Value may be a number, a previously defined parameter, a
mathematical function, a parametric expression, or a
character string.

TO ANSYS
• Use *GET or get functions to retrieve data from the ANSYS
database.

ANSYS 10.0-
• ANSYS stores data in their actual form (numbers or strings),
not in the form of parameter names.

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
APDL Basics
D. Workshop Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Refer to your Workshop Supplement for instructions on:
W10. 2-D Bracket Using Parameters

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0 -- Part 1
Training Manual

13. Loading & Solution


Loading & Solution
Overview Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• So far, we have seen how to apply the following types of
loads:
– Displacement (DOF constraints)
– Pressure and convection (surface loads)
– Gravity (inertia loads)
– “Structural” temperatures (body loads)

TO ANSYS
These loads account for four of the five main categories. In

ANSYS 10.0
this chapter, we will account for the remaining category —
concentrated loads, such as nodal forces in a stress analysis.

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Loading & Solution
...Overview Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• We will cover the following topics in this chapter:
A. Force Loads
B. Nodal Coordinate System
C. Solvers
D. Multiple Load Steps
E. Workshop

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Loading & Solution
A. Force Loads Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• A force is a concentrated load (or
“point load”) that you can apply at a
node or keypoint.
• Point loads such as forces are
appropriate for line element models
such as beams, spars, and springs.

TO ANSYS
In solid and shell models, point loads

ANSYS 10.0
usually cause a stress singularity,
but are acceptable if you ignore
stresses in the vicinity. Remember,

10.0 -- Part
you can use select logic to “ignore”
the elements in the vicinity of the
point load.

Part 1
1
Loading & Solution
...Force Loads Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• In the 2-D solid model shown at bottom left, notice that
maximum stress SMAX (=12064) is reported at the location of
the force.
When the nodes and elements in the vicinity of the force are
unselected, SMAX (=6141) moves to the bottom corner, which
is another singularity (because of the displacement

TO ANSYS
constraint at the corner).

ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Loading & Solution
...Force Loads Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
By unselecting nodes and elements near the bottom corner,
you get the expected stress distribution with SMAX (=3946)
near the top hole.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Loading & Solution
...Force Loads Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Note that for axisymmetric models:
• Input values of forces are based on the full 360°.
• Output values (reaction forces) are also based on the full 360°.
• For example, suppose a cylindrical shell of radius r has an edge
load of P lb/in. To apply this load on a 2-D axisymmetric shell model
(SHELL51 elements, for example), you would specify a force of 2πrP.

TO ANSYS
P lb/in 2πrP lb

ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
r

Part 1
1
Loading & Solution
...Force Loads Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• To apply a force, the following information is needed:
– node or keypoint number (which you can identify by picking)
– force magnitude (which should be consistent with the system of
units you are using)
– direction of the force — FX, FY, or FZ

Use:

TO ANSYS
– Solution > Define Loads > Apply > Force/Moment

ANSYS 10.0
– Or the commands FK or F

• Question: In which coordinate system are FX, FY, and FZ

10.0 -- Part
interpreted?

Part 1
1
Loading & Solution
B. Nodal Coordinate System Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• All forces, displacements, and other direction-dependent
nodal quantities are interpreted in the nodal coordinate
system.
– Input quantities:
• Forces and moments FX, FY, FZ, MX, MY, MZ
• Displacement constraints UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ

TO ANSYS
• Coupling and constraint equations

ANSYS 10.0
• Etc.
– Output quantities:
• Calculated displacements UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ

10.0 -- Part
• Reaction forces FX, FY, FZ, MX, MY, MZ
• Etc.

Part 1
1
Loading & Solution
...Nodal Coordinate System Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• A nodal coordinate system is attached to every node in the
model.
• By default, the nodal CS is parallel to global Cartesian, i.e, all
applied forces and displacement constraints are interpreted
in global Cartesian by default.

TO ANSYS
Yn

ANSYS 10.0
Xn
Yn
Xn

Yn

10.0 -- Part
Xn

Part 1
Y Yn
X Xn

1
Loading & Solution
...Nodal Coordinate System Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• If necessary, you can rotate
the nodal CS to a different
orientation.
For example:
– To simulate an inclined
roller support.

TO ANSYS
– To apply radial forces.

ANSYS 10.0
– To apply radial constraints
(perhaps to simulate a
rigid, press-fitted pin).

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Loading & Solution
...Nodal Coordinate System Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• To “rotate nodes,” use this four-step procedure:
1. Select the desired nodes.
2. Activate the coordinate system (or create a local CS)
into which you want to rotate the nodes, e.g, CSYS,1.
3. Choose Preprocessor > Modeling > Move/Modify >
Rotate Node CS > To Active CS, then press [Pick All] in
the picker.

TO ANSYS
Or issue NROTAT,ALL.

ANSYS 10.0
4. Reactivate all nodes.

• Note: When you apply symmetry on anti-symmetry

10.0 -- Part
boundary conditions, ANSYS automatically rotates
all nodes on that boundary.

Part 1
1
Loading & Solution
...Nodal Coordinate System Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Demo:
– Resume rib.db.
– Offset working plane to center of bottom circle (using average keypoint
location).
– Create local cylindrical CS at working plane origin.
– Select nodes at radius = 0.35 and plot them.
– Rotate all selected nodes into active system.

TO ANSYS
– Apply a UX displacement constraint (or an FX force) at all selected

ANSYS 10.0
nodes. Note the radial direction.
– Now activate global Cartesian (CSYS,0).
– Rotate all selected nodes into active system.

10.0 -- Part
– Replot, and note the new direction of the loads.

Part 1
1
Loading & Solution
C. Solvers Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• The function of the solver is to solve the system of linear
simultaneous equations representing the structure’s degrees
of freedom.
• The solution could take anywhere from a few seconds to
several hours depending primarily on the size of the model
and the speed of your computer.

TO ANSYS
• A linear static analysis with one load step requires only one

ANSYS 10.0
such solution, but a nonlinear or transient analysis may
require tens, hundreds, or even thousands of such solutions.
Therefore, the type of solver you choose for solution could

10.0 -- Part
be important.

Part 1
1
Loading & Solution
...Solvers Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• The solvers available in ANSYS can be categorized into two
types:
– Direct elimination solvers
• Frontal
• Sparse
– Iterative solvers

TO ANSYS
• PCG (Pre-conditioned Conjugate Gradient)

ANSYS 10.0
• ICCG (Incomplete Cholesky Conjugate Gradient)
• JCG (Jacobi Conjugate Gradient)

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Loading & Solution
...Solvers Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Direct elimination solvers calculate the
solution as follows: Formulate element .emat
1. Formulate individual element matrices. matrices file

2. Read in degrees of freedom (DOF) for the


first element.
3. Eliminate any DOF that has a known
value or can be expressed in terms of
Assemble

TO ANSYS
other DOFs, then write an equation to the .tri
.tri file. The remaining DOFs constitute and triangularize file

ANSYS 10.0
the wavefront. global matrix

4. Repeat steps 2 & 3 for all elements until


all DOFs have been eliminated. The .tri
file now contains a triangularized matrix.

10.0 -- Part
5. Calculate the DOF solution by back Back-substitute results
substitution, then use element matrices for solution file

Part 1
to calculate the element solution.

1
Loading & Solution
...Solvers Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• The wavefront is the number of DOF retained by the solver
during triangularization because they cannot yet be
eliminated. It swells and shrinks as the solution progresses,
and finally becomes zero when all DOF have been eliminated.
• The value of wavefront directly affects solution time: the
higher the wavefront, the longer the solution time.

TO ANSYS
• Reordering the elements — choosing a proper order in which

ANSYS 10.0
elements are processed by the solver — can reduce the
wavefront. ANSYS does automatic reordering at the
beginning of a solution.

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Loading & Solution
...Solvers Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Iterative solvers calculate the solution
as follows: Formulate element .emat
1. Formulate individual element matrices. matrices file

2. Assemble the global stiffness matrix.


3. Start with an assumed zero value for all
DOF and iterate to convergence (based
on an input tolerance on residual force).

TO ANSYS
Assemble .full
4. Use element matrices to calculate the
global matrix file
element solution.

ANSYS 10.0
• The main difference between the
iterative solvers in ANSYS — PCG,
JCG, ICCG — is the type of pre-

10.0 -- Part
conditioner used. results
Iterate
to solution file

Part 1
1
Loading & Solution
...Solvers Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Model Size Memory Disk
Solver When to Use
(DOFs) Use Use
When robustness is required (nonlinear analysis) or
Frontal < 50k Low High
when memory is limited.
10k - 500k
When robustness and solution speed are required
(more for
(nonlinear analysis); for linear analysis where iterative
Sparse shell & Medium High
solvers are slow to converge (especially for ill-
beam

TO ANSYS
conditioned matrices, such as poorly shaped elements).
models)

ANSYS 10.0
When solution speed is crucial (linear analysis of large 50k -
PCG High Low
models, especially those with solid elements). 1000k+
When solution speed is crucial in multiphysics

10.0 -- Part
applications. Handles models that have convergence 50k -
ICCG High Low
difficulties with other iterative solvers (nearly indefinite 1000k+
matrices).

Part 1
When solution speed is crucial in "single-field" problems 50k -
JCG Medium Low
(thermal, magnetics, acoustics, and multiphysics). 1000k+

1
Loading & Solution
...Solvers Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• To choose a solver:
– Solution > Analysis Type > Sol’n Control, then choose Sol’n Options
tab
– Or use EQSLV command

The default is to use a “program chosen” solver [eqslv,-1],


which is usually the sparse direct solver.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Loading & Solution
D. Multiple Load Steps Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• So far, we have seen how to solve for one set of loading
conditions, i.e, one load step.
– Import or create the model
– Mesh it
– Apply loads
– Solve (one load step)

TO ANSYS
– Review results

ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Loading & Solution
...Multiple Load Steps Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• If you have multiple loading conditions,
you can choose one of two ways:
– Solve for all loads together in a single
load step
– Or apply each loading condition
separately and solve multiple load steps.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Loading & Solution
...Multiple Load Steps Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• A load step can be defined as one set of loading conditions
for which you obtain a solution.
• By using multiple load steps, you can:
– “isolate” the structure’s response to each loading condition.
– combine these responses in any desired fashion during
postprocessing, allowing you to study different “what-if”

TO ANSYS
scenarios. (This is called load case combination and is valid for
linear analyses only. It is covered in Chapter 14.)

ANSYS 10.0
• There are two ways to define and solve multiple load steps:
– Multiple solve method

10.0 -- Part
– Load step file method

Part 1
1
Loading & Solution
...Multiple Load Steps Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Multiple Solve Method
• An extension of the single-load- – Import or create the model
step solution, where you solve – Mesh it
each load step sequentially without
– Apply loads
leaving the Solution processor.
– Solve (load step 1)
• Best suited for batch mode.
– Apply different loads

TO ANSYS
• When used in interactive mode, – Solve (load step 2)
this method is useful only for

ANSYS 10.0
– Apply different loads
models that solve quickly.
– Solve (load step 3)
– Etc.

10.0 -- Part
– Review results

Part 1
1
Loading & Solution
...Multiple Load Steps Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Load Step File Method
• In this case, instead of solving each – Import or create the model
load step, you write the load step – Mesh it
information to a file, called the load
– Apply loads
step file:
– Write to LS file (.s01)
– Solution > Load Step Opts > Write LS
File – Apply different loads

TO ANSYS
– Or use LSWRITE command. – Write to LS file (.s02)

ANSYS 10.0
– Apply different loads
• The load step file is named
jobname.s01, .s02, .s03, etc. – Write to LS file (.s03)
– Etc.
• After all load steps have been written

10.0 -- Part
out, you can use one command — – Solve from LS files
LSSOLVE or Solution > Solve> From LS – Review results

Part 1
Files — to read in each file
sequentially and solve it.

1
Loading & Solution
...Multiple Load Steps Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• The advantage of the load step file method is that you can
interactively set up all load steps even for a large model and
then solve them while you are away from the computer.
• Note: The loading commands on the load step file are always
in terms of nodes and elements, even if you apply loads on
the solid model.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Loading & Solution
...Multiple Load Steps Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• For both methods:
– Loads applied in a previous load step will stay in the database
unless they are deleted. So be sure to delete any loads that are
not part of the current load step.
– Results for each load step are appended to the results file and
identified as load step 1, load step 2, etc.
– In postprocessing, you first “read in” the desired set of results

TO ANSYS
and then review them.

ANSYS 10.0
– The database contains the loads and results for the last load
step that was solved.

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Loading & Solution
...Multiple Load Steps Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Demo:
– Resume rib.db
– Fix left line in UX and bottom line in UY
– Apply pressure = 100 on top line
– Write LS file 1, then list it and show F.E. load commands
– Apply pressure = 50 to 100 (tapered) on right line

TO ANSYS
– Delete the top pressure load

ANSYS 10.0
– Write LS file 2
– LSSOLVE,1,2
– Review results for each load step separately

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Loading & Solution
E. Workshop Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• This workshop consists of three exercises:
W11A. 3-D Bracket
W11B. Connecting Rod
W11C. Wheel

Refer to your Workshop Supplement for instructions.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION ANSYS 10.0-
TO ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0-- Part 1
Training Manual

14. Postprocessing
Postprocessing
Overview Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• There are many ways to review results in the general
postprocessor (POST1), some of which have already been
covered.
• In this chapter, we will explore two additional methods —
query picking and path operations — and also introduce you
to the concepts of results transformation, error estimation,

TO ANSYS
and load case combination.

ANSYS 10.0
• Topics covered:
A. Query Picking D. Error Estimation
B. Results Coordinate System E. Load Case Combinations

10.0 -- Part
C. Path Operations F. Workshop

Part 1
1
Postprocessing
A. Query Picking Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Query picking allows you to “probe” the model for stresses,
displacements, or other results quantities at any picked
location.
• You can also quickly locate the maximum and minimum
values of the item being queried.
• Available only through the GUI (no commands):

TO ANSYS
– General Postproc > Query Results > Nodal or Element or Subgrid

ANSYS 10.0
Solu...
– Choose a results quantity and press OK
PowerGraphics
PowerGraphics
ON

10.0 -- Part
OFF

Part 1
1
Postprocessing
...Query Picking Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
– Then pick any point in the model to see the results value at that
point.
• Min and Max will show the value at the minimum and
maximum points.
• Use Reset to clear all values and start over.
• Notice that the entity number, its location, and the results
value are also shown in the Picker.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Postprocessing
...Query Picking Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Demo:
– Continue from the last multi-load-step solution of rib.db
– Plot SEQV for load step 1
– Query “Nodal Solu” SEQV at several locations, including MIN & MAX.
(Switch to full graphics if needed.)
– Switch to PowerGraphics and query “Subgrid Solu.”

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Postprocessing
B. Results Coordinate System Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• All direction-dependent quantities that you view in POST1,
such as component stresses, displacements, and reaction
forces, are reported in the results coordinate system (RSYS).
• RSYS defaults to 0 (global Cartesian). That is, POST1
transforms all results to global Cartesian by default, including
results at “rotated” nodes.

TO ANSYS
• But there are many situations — such as pressure vessels

ANSYS 10.0
and spherical structures — where you need to check the
results in a cylindrical, spherical, or other local coordinate
system.

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Postprocessing
...Results Coordinate System Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• To change the results CS to a
different system, use:
– General Postproc > Options for Outp…
– or the RSYS command

All subsequent contour plots, listings, query picks, etc. will


report the values in that system.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Default orientation Local cylindrical Global cylindrical

Part 1
RSYS,0 system RSYS,11 system RSYS,1

1
Postprocessing
...Results Coordinate System Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• RSYS,SOLU
– Sets the results CS to “as-calculated.”

TO ANSYS
– All subsequent contour plots, listings, query picks, etc. will

ANSYS 10.0
report the values in the nodal and element coordinate systems.
• DOF results and reaction forces will be in the nodal CS.
• Stresses, strains, etc. will be in the element CS. (The

10.0 -- Part
orientation of the element CS depends on the element type
and the ESYS attribute of the element. Most solid elements,
for example, default to global Cartesian.)

Part 1
– Not supported by PowerGraphics.

1
Postprocessing
C. Path Operations Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Another way to review results is via path operations, which
allow you to:
– map results data onto an arbitrary “path” through the model
– perform mathematical operations along the path, including
integration and differentiation
– display a “path plot” — see how a result item varies along the

TO ANSYS
path

ANSYS 10.0
• Available only for models containing 2-D or 3-D solid
elements or shell elements.

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Postprocessing
...Path Operations Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Three steps to produce a path plot:
– Define a path
– Map data onto the path
– Plot the data

1. Define a Path

TO ANSYS
– Requires the following information:

ANSYS 10.0
• Points defining the path (2 to 1000). You can use existing
nodes or locations on the working plane.
• Path curvature, determined by the active coordinate system

10.0 -- Part
(CSYS).
• A name for the path.

Part 1
1
Postprocessing
...Path Operations Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
1. Define a Path (cont’d)
– First activate the desired coordinate system (CSYS).
– General Postproc > Path Operations > Define Path > By Nodes or On
Working Plane
• Pick the nodes or WP locations that form the desired path,
and press OK

TO ANSYS
• Choose a path name. The nSets and nDiv fields are best left
to default in most cases.

ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Postprocessing
...Path Operations Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
2. Map Data onto Path
– General Postproc > Path Operations > Map onto Path… (or PDEF
command)
• Choose desired quantity, such as SX.
• Enter a label for the quantity, to be used on plots and listings.
– You can now display the path if needed.

TO ANSYS
• General Postproc > Path Operations > Plot Paths

ANSYS 10.0
• (or issue /PBC,PATH,1 followed by NPLOT or EPLOT)

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Postprocessing
...Path Operations Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
3. Plot the Data
– You can plot path items either on a graph:
• PLPATH or General Postproc > Path Operations > On Graph...
– or along path geometry:
• PLPAGM or General Postproc > Path Operations > On
Geometry...

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Postprocessing
...Path Operations Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• ANSYS allows you to define multiple paths, each with
a unique name that you assign. Only one path can be
active at a time.
• Besides plots and listings, there are many other path
capabilities, including:
– Stress linearization — used in the pressure vessel

TO ANSYS
industry to decompose stress along a path into its
membrane and bending components.

ANSYS 10.0
– Calculus functions — used in fracture mechanics to
calculate J-integrals and stress concentration factors.
Also useful in thermal analyses to calculate the heat lost

10.0 -- Part
or gained across a path.
– Dot products and cross products — used widely in

Part 1
electromagnetics analyses to operate on vector
quantities.

1
Postprocessing
...Path Operations Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Demo:
– Continue with rib postprocessing…
– Plot nodes, then switch to CSYS,1 if desired
– Define a path using nodes
– Map SX or SEQV or other data onto path
– Plot the path itself

TO ANSYS
– Plot the path item on graph and on geometry

ANSYS 10.0
– Define a second path elsewhere in the model and show how to toggle
between the two.

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Postprocessing
D. Error Estimation Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• The finite element solution calculates stresses on a per-
element basis, i.e, stresses are individually calculated in each
element.
• When you plot nodal stress contours in POST1, however, you
will see smooth contours because the stresses are averaged
at the nodes.

TO ANSYS
If you plot the element solution, you will see unaveraged data,

ANSYS 10.0
which shows the discontinuity between elements.
• The difference between averaged and σavg = 1100

unaveraged stresses gives an

10.0 -- Part
σ = 1000 σ = 1200
indication of how “good” or how “bad”
Elem 1 Elem 2
the mesh is. This is the basis for error σ = 1100 σ = 1300

Part 1
estimation.
σavg = 1200

1
Postprocessing
...Error Estimation Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Error estimation is available only in POST1 and is valid only
for:
– linear static structural and linear steady-state thermal analyses
– solid elements (2-D and 3-D) and shell elements
– full graphics (not PowerGraphics)

If these conditions are not met, ANSYS automatically turns

TO ANSYS
off error estimation calculations.

ANSYS 10.0
• To manually activate or deactivate error estimation, use
– ERNORM,ON/OFF

10.0 -- Part
– or General Postproc > Options for Outp...

Part 1
1
Postprocessing
...Error Estimation Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• POST1 calculates the following error measures.
– Stress analysis:
• percentage error in energy norm (SEPC)
• element stress deviations (SDSG)
• element energy error (SERR)
• maximum and minimum stress bounds (SMXB, SMNB)

TO ANSYS
– Thermal analysis:

ANSYS 10.0
• percentage error in energy norm (TEPC)
• element thermal gradient deviations (TDSG)
• element energy error (TERR)

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Postprocessing
...Error Estimation Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Percentage error in energy norm (SEPC)
• SEPC is a rough estimate of the stress error (or
displacement, temperature, or thermal flux) over the entire set
of selected elements.
• Can be used to compare similar models of similar structures
subjected to similar loadings.

TO ANSYS
• SEPC is shown in the legend column of deformed shape

ANSYS 10.0
displays. You can list it manually using PRERR or General
Postproc > List Results > Percent Error.

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Postprocessing
...Error Estimation Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• As a general rule of thumb,
look for SEPC to be 10% or
less. If it is higher, then:
– Check for point loads or
other stress singularities
and unselect elements in
the vicinity.

TO ANSYS
– If it is still higher, plot the

ANSYS 10.0
element energy error. The
elements with high values
of energy error are
candidates for mesh

10.0 -- Part
refinement.

Part 1
1
Postprocessing
...Error Estimation Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Element stress deviations (SDSG)
• SDSG is a measure of the amount by
which an element’s stress disagrees
with the stress averages at its nodes.
• You can plot SDSG contours using
PLESOL,SDSG or General Postproc >
Plot Results > Element Solu...

TO ANSYS
• A high value of SDSG is not

ANSYS 10.0
necessarily bad, especially if it is a
small percentage of the nominal
stresses in the structure.

10.0 -- Part
SDSG at location of interest
For example, this plate-with-a-hole = ~450 psi, which is ~1.5% of
model shows only a 1.5% stress ~30,000 psi nominal stress

Part 1
deviation in the region of interest.

1
Postprocessing
...Error Estimation Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Element energy error (SERR)
• SERR is the energy associated with the stress mismatches at
the nodes of the element. This is the basic error measure
from which the other error quantities are derived. SERR has
units of energy.
• To plot SERR contours, issue PLESOL,SERR or General

TO ANSYS
Postproc > Plot Results > Element Solu...

ANSYS 10.0
• Generally, the elements with the highest SERR are
candidates for mesh refinement. However, since SERR will
always be highest at stress singularities, be sure to unselect

10.0 -- Part
those elements first.

Part 1
1
Postprocessing
...Error Estimation Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Stress bounds (SMXB and SMNB)
• The stress bounds can help you determine the potential
effect of mesh discretization error on the maximum stress.
• They are displayed on stress contour plots in the legend
column as SMXB (upper bound) and SMNB (lower bound).

TO ANSYS
• The bounds are not estimates of the actual maximum and
minimum, but they do define a “confidence band.” Without

ANSYS 10.0
other supporting verification, you have no basis for believing
that the true maximum stress is below SMXB.

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Postprocessing
...Error Estimation Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Caution: If you don’t unselect elements near stress
singularities, the stress bounds are meaningless, as shown
below.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Postprocessing
E. Load Case Combinations Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Whenever you solve multiple load steps, the results of each
load step are stored as separate sets on the results file
(identified by load step number).
• A load case combination is an operation between two sets of
results, which are called load cases.
– The operation occurs between one load case in the database

TO ANSYS
and the second load case on the results file.

ANSYS 10.0
– The result of the operation — the combined load case — is
stored back in the database.

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
Load case in database Load case Combined load case in database
(computer memory) on results file overwrites previous contents

1
Postprocessing
...Load Case Combinations Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Typical procedure:
1. Create the load cases
2. Read one load case into the database
3. Perform the desired operation

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Postprocessing
...Load Case Combinations Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Create Load Cases
• A load case simply acts as a pointer to a set of
results. It requires two pieces of information:
– a unique ID number
– the results set it represents (load step and substep
number)

TO ANSYS
• Use the LCDEF command or General Postproc >

ANSYS 10.0
Load Case > Create Load Case

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Postprocessing
...Load Case Combinations Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Read One Load Case into the Database
• Simply identify the results set by its load case
number using LCASE or General Postproc > Load
Case > Read Load Case.
• Or use one of the standard “Read Results” choices
in the postprocessor (SET command).

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Postprocessing
...Load Case Combinations Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Perform the Desired Operation
• Many operations are available as shown in the
menu here.
• Use the LCOPER command or General Postproc >
Load Case > Add, Subtract, etc.

TO ANSYS
• Remember that the results of the operation are
stored in the database. The combined load case is

ANSYS 10.0
identified on plots and listings as number 9999.

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Postprocessing
...Load Case Combinations Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• There are two useful options to save the combined load case:
– Write a load case file
– Append the load case to the results file

• Writing a load case file (LCWRITE or General Postproc Write Results)


creates a file that is similar to, but much smaller than the results file.
• The Append option (RAPPND or General Postproc > Load Case > Write

TO ANSYS
Load Case) allows you to add the combined load case to the results
file and identify it with a given load step number and time value.

ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Postprocessing
F. Workshop Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• This workshop consists of three exercises:
W12A. Connecting Rod
W12B. Spherical Shell
W12C. Axisymmetric Fin with Multiple Load Steps

Refer to your Workshop Supplement for instructions.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0 -- Part 1
Training Manual

15. Short Topics


Short Topics Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• In this chapter, we will present some general tips and “tricks”
on how to use ANSYS more efficiently:
A. Toolbar & Abbreviations
B. Start File
C. Input Files
D. Batch Mode

TO ANSYS
E. Workshop

ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Short Topics
A. Toolbar & Abbreviations Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• An abbreviation is a short-cut to commonly used functions. It
is a character string that represents one or more ANSYS
commands.
• Whenever you define an abbreviation, it appears as a button
in the ANSYS Toolbar, giving you one-button access to the
desired function.

TO ANSYS
• There are four predefined abbreviations when you first start

ANSYS 10.0
ANSYS, but you can modify them or add your own — up to
100 total abbreviations.

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Short Topics
...Toolbar & Abbreviations Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• As an example, to display line numbers on a line plot, you would
need to do the following:
– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Numbering… > Line numbers On > OK
– Utility Menu > Plot > Lines

Later, to turn off line numbers, you would have to use the same
menus again.

TO ANSYS
• Instead, you could define two abbreviations:

ANSYS 10.0
– LINE_ON for the command string ‘/pnum,line,on $lplot’
– LINE_OFF for ‘/pnum,line,off $lplot’

and simply press the appropriate button in the toolbar to turn line

10.0 -- Part
numbering on or off.

Part 1
1
Short Topics
...Toolbar & Abbreviations Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• The following information is needed for an abbreviation:
– The short-cut name
– The command string it represents. To find out the command for a
particular function, first execute the function using the GUI, then list the
log file (Utility Menu > List > Files > Log File).

• Use the *ABBR command to define abbreviations:


– *ABBR, name, command_string

TO ANSYS
– If command_string consists of more than one

ANSYS 10.0
command (separated by a $ sign), it must be
enclosed in single quotes.

A convenient dialog box is available for this:

10.0 -- Part
– Utility Menu > MenuCtrls > Edit Toolbar…
– or Utility Menu > Macro > Edit Abbreviations…

Part 1
1
Short Topics
...Toolbar & Abbreviations Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Abbreviations are stored in the standard ANSYS database, so
they get saved to the .db file when you save the database.
• You can also write abbreviations to an ASCII file,
jobname.abbr:
– Utility Menu > MenuCtrls > Save Toolbar…
– or Utility Menu > Macro > Save Abbr…

TO ANSYS
– or ABBSAV command

ANSYS 10.0
• To restore abbreviations from a file, use:
– Utility Menu > MenuCtrls > Restore Toolbar…

10.0 -- Part
– or Utility Menu > Macro > Restore Abbr…
– or ABBRES command

Part 1
1
Short Topics
...Toolbar & Abbreviations Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• By creating a series of .abbr files and with a clever use of
ABBSAV and ABBRES functions, you can create “nested”
toolbars — buttons that bring up an entirely new set of
buttons — and put together a menu of your own!
• Once you master the ANSYS command language, there is
virtually no limit to the power and usefulness of
abbreviations!

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Short Topics
...Toolbar & Abbreviations Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Demo:
– Resume rib.db
– Create abbreviations EPLOT, APLOT, LPLOT, KPLOT
– Delete KPLOT abbreviation
– Save abbreviations to file.abbr, then list the file
– Now list the log file and show the ABBSAVE command. (This is

TO ANSYS
how you can find out the commands for a given function.)

ANSYS 10.0
– Resume rib.db again
– Restore abbreviations from file.abbr and use the buttons

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Short Topics
B. Start File Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Whenever you start ANSYS, it reads a start file called
start56.ans (or start55.ans, start57.ans, etc. depending on
ANSYS revision).
• You can include any commands in the start file. The most
common ones are abbreviation definitions.
• ANSYS checks for the start file first in the working directory

TO ANSYS
and then in your home directory. If no file is found, it will

ANSYS 10.0
read the “default” start file in the ANSYS documentation
directory (/ansys56/docu).
– The “default” start file contains several suggested

10.0 -- Part
abbreviations, all of them commented out. You can make a copy
of it and “uncomment” the ones you want to use.

Part 1
1
Short Topics
C. Input Files Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• ANSYS is a command-driven program and can accept
commands from several sources:
– from GUI dialog boxes (which simply “send” commands to
ANSYS when you press OK or Apply)
– from the keyboard
– from input files

TO ANSYS
• An efficient way to run ANSYS, especially when you are

ANSYS 10.0
rerunning a previous analysis, is to use input files containing
the desired command sequence:
– Utility Menu > File > Read Input from…

10.0 -- Part
– or the /INPUT command

(The start file is just an input file that is automatically read at

Part 1
start-up by a built-in /input command.)

1
Short Topics
...Input Files Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• For example, you can create a file called rectangle.inp
containing the following lines:
/prep7 ! Enter preprocessor
rect,0,3,0,1 ! Create a 3x1 rectangle
aplot

and then read it into ANSYS:

TO ANSYS
/input,rectangle,inp ! or File > Read Input from…

ANSYS 10.0
• The ! character above indicates a comment and can be used
to:

10.0 -- Part
– annotate the input file with explanations.

Part 1
– “comment out” an entire command.

1
Short Topics
...Input Files Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• You can use the log file jobname.log as an input file. Keep in
mind the following points when you do this:
– The log file records all commands executed during an ANSYS
session.
– Always use a copy of the log file, don’t just rename it.
– It may be helpful to edit the copy first and:

TO ANSYS
• add descriptive comments

ANSYS 10.0
• “clean it up” by removing erroneous commands and graphics
commands (/view, /focus, /dist, etc.)
• add prompting commands (*ASK)

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Short Topics
...Input Files Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
The *ASK Command
• *ASK prompts the user for input and assigns the response to
a parameter. For example, you can modify rectangle.inp as
follows:
/prep7 ! Enter preprocessor
*ask,w,WIDTH OF RECTANGLE,3

TO ANSYS
rect,0,w,0,1 ! Create a wx1 rectangle
aplot

ANSYS 10.0
When you input this file into ANSYS, you will see the prompt
shown below. Your response, say 5.2, is assigned to the

10.0 -- Part
parameter w, which is used in the subsequent RECT
command.

Part 1
1
Short Topics
...Input Files Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• *ASK, Par, Query, DVAL
– Par is the parameter name to which the response value is
assigned.
– Query is the prompt string, up to 32 characters. The word
ENTER automatically appears as the first word of the prompt.
– DVAL is the default value assigned to Par if the response is
blank.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Short Topics
D. Batch Mode Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• In batch mode, ANSYS reads commands from an input file
you supply, and writes responses to an output file. The
process runs in the background, freeing up your computer
for other work.
• Of the three main phases of an analysis — preprocessing,
solution, postprocessing — the solution phase is best suited
for batch mode. Thus a batch input file could be as simple

TO ANSYS
as:

ANSYS 10.0
resume,... ! Resume database from preprocessing session
/solu
solve

10.0 -- Part
finish

Part 1
1
Short Topics
...Batch Mode Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• To start a batch run, use the Batch button on the launcher, or
use the -b option if using the command line to start ANSYS:
– For example, ansys10.0 -b -m 128 -db 32 < file.inp > file.out &

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Short Topics
E. Workshop Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• This workshop consists solves the classic plate-with-a-hole
problem using three methods:
W13A. Batch Mode
W13B. *ASK
W13C. Abbreviations

Refer to your Workshop Supplement for instructions.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION ANSYS 10.0-
TO ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0-- Part 1
Training Manual

16. Mechanical Toolbar


Mechanical Toolbar
Overview Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• The Mechanical Toolbar (MTB) is a streamlined GUI designed
to do mechanical analyses quickly and easily:
– Linear static analysis
– Modal analysis
– Steady-state thermal analysis

• Main advantages of using MTB:

TO ANSYS
– Easy to use. Tabs in the toolbar lead you through the analysis

ANSYS 10.0
steps in sequence.
– Provides more ways to apply loads, such as total force on an
area or line.

10.0 -- Part
– Handles multiple loading environments well, with user-assigned
names and automatic “book-keeping” of files.

Part 1
– Allows you to generate an HTML report of the analysis.

1
Mechanical Toolbar
...Overview Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• The MTB does have a few limitations, mainly in view of
keeping it simple and easy to use:
– No solid modeling capabilities. All geometry is imported — via
IGES as well as Connection products. You can also “import”
geometry from an ANSYS .db file.
– Contains only commonly used graphics controls and
postprocessing functions. However, the Utility Menu is available

TO ANSYS
and provides access to all graphics functions.

ANSYS 10.0
– No nonlinearities or multiphysics capabilities.

• In this chapter, we will give you a quick “guided tour” of the


Mechanical Toolbar, followed by a workshop.

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Mechanical Toolbar
A Quick Tour Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• To start the MTB, click on Utility Menu > MenuCtrls >
Mechanical Toolbar
– The “Mechanical Toolbar” window will appear, replacing the
Main Menu, Toolbar, and Input window. (If you want to use the
Toolbar or Input window, use Utiliy Menu > MenuCtrls to activate
them.)
– If you already have a model in the database, ANSYS will save it

TO ANSYS
to preMT.db, which you can use later to “import” the geometry

ANSYS 10.0
portion.

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Mechanical Toolbar
...A Quick Tour Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
New model,
Analysis Resume model,
sequence tabs Save model “To full ANSYS”

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
Prompt Status
area Hard copy area

Plot controls System utilities: Help & Tour

10.0 -- Part
calculator, editor
View
fly-out

Part 1
Plot
fly-out

1
Mechanical Toolbar
...A Quick Tour Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Using the MTB to do your analysis is quite simple —
simply use the tabs in sequence from left to right.
• And help is available in many forms:
– All buttons and menus provide “tool tips” as well as
prompts.
– Most dialog boxes have a Help button that provides
context-sensitive help.

TO ANSYS
– The [Tour] button next to [?] provides detailed explanations

ANSYS 10.0
of each analysis step.
– Also, click the right mouse button on any button or menu,
then click on [What’s This?] to get a brief description of
that item.

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Mechanical Toolbar - A Quick Tour
Setup Tab Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Use the Setup tab to specify:
– analysis discipline
– analysis type
– units system
– title
– MTB properties

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
Analysis title

1
Mechanical Toolbar - A Quick Tour
Model Tab Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• The Model tab is used to:
– import geometry
– assign attributes to geometry
– create the mesh. If no mesh is created, MTB will automatically
mesh it during solution.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Import Assign material MeshTool

Part 1
Assign shape SmartSize Mesh
(real constants) slider

1
Mechanical Toolbar - A Quick Tour
Load Tab Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• The Load tab allows you to:
– specify environment name(s)
– apply or delete loads

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
Symmetry BC

10.0 -- Part
Apply or Load buttons
Delete with fly-outs

Part 1
1
Mechanical Toolbar - A Quick Tour
Solve Tab Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• The Solve tab allows you to solve “now” or at a specified later time.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Solve
button

Part 1
1
Mechanical Toolbar - A Quick Tour
Results Tab Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Use the Results tab to:
– review displaced shape and contour plots for the desired environment
– query, animate, or list results
– generate an HTML report, which can be e-mailed or posted on the web.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
Contour, Query, Animate, List

1
Mechanical Toolbar
A Quick Tour Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Demo:
– Clear the database and start MTB – Load
– Setup • constrain left-side line in UX,
• change units to inch-lbm-s bottom line in UY

• type in a title, “Plane stress • 100-lb pressure on top line


analysis of a rib” – Solve now
• bring up Properties and enter a • notice that MTB generates the
user name mesh

TO ANSYS
– Model – Results
• import ribgeom.db • animate SEQV

ANSYS 10.0
• change Axisymmetric to Plane • generate report
Stress, then enter – Click the “To ANSYS” button. The
Name=1/8thick, Thickness=1/8 model comes up in full ANSYS,

10.0 -- Part
• set smart-size slider to 4 where you can now extend it to
(notice change in element size nonlinearities and other complex
in Mesh button), but do not analyses.
mesh

Part 1
1
Workshop Training Manual

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• Refer to your Workshop Supplement for instructions on:
W14. Pipe Shell

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS Part 1
10.0 -- Part
ANSYS 10.0 1
Workshop Supplement

ANSYS Basics
Introductory Workshop
Workshop 1
Introductory Workshop
ANSYS Basics Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
• In this workshop, we will exercise some of the basic ANSYS
concepts, such as resuming an existing database file,
plotting entities, manipulating the view, clearing the
database, and creating a few entities.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Introductory Workshop
ANSYS Basics Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
1. Enter ANSYS in the working directory specified by your instructor using “file” as the
jobname.
2. Resume the “wheel.db1” database file:
– Utility Menu > File > Resume from…

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
3. Plot the following solid model entities:

10.0 -- Part
– Utility Menu > Plot > Keypoints > Keypoints [KPLOT]
– Utility Menu > Plot > Lines [LPLOT]
– Utility Menu > Plot > Areas [APLOT]

Part 1
– Utility Menu > Plot > Volumes [VPLOT]
– Utility Menu > Plot > Multi-Plots [GPLOT]

1
Introductory Workshop
ANSYS Basics Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
4. Open the Pan-Zoom-Rotate menu:
– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Pan, Zoom, Rotate ...

5. Experiment with the buttons on the Pan, Zoom, Rotate menu.


6. Activate “Dynamic Mode” and pan, zoom, and rotate the model using
the three mouse buttons.
7. Deactivate “Dynamic Mode” and then dynamically pan, zoom, and
rotate the model by holding down the control key “Ctrl” and using the
three mouse buttons.

TO ANSYS
8. Display an isometric view of the entire model:

ANSYS 10.0
– [Iso]
– [Fit]
– Or issue:
/VIEW,,1,1,1

10.0 -- Part
/AUTO

9. Clear the database:


– Utility Menu > File > Clear & Start New …

Part 1
– Or issue:
/CLEAR

1
Introductory Workshop
ANSYS Basics Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
10. Create keypoints:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Create > Keypoints > On Working Plane +

11. Create lines:


– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Create > Lines > Lines > Straight Line +

12. Plot lines and keypoints:


– Utility Menu > Plot > Multi-Plots [GPLOT]

13. Save the database to “file.db”:


– Pick the “SAVE_DB” button in the Toolbar (or select: Utility Menu > File > Save as Jobname.db)

TO ANSYS
– Or issue:
SAVE

ANSYS 10.0
14. Delete some of the lines:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Delete > Lines Only +

15. Plot lines and keypoints:

10.0 -- Part
– Utility Menu > Plot > Multi-Plots [GPLOT]

16. Resume the previously saved “file.db” database file:

Part 1
– Click the “RESUM_DB” button in the Toolbar (or select: Utility Menu > File > Resume Jobname.db)
– Or issue:
RESUME

1
Introductory Workshop
ANSYS Basics Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
17. Plot lines and keypoints:
– Utility Menu > Plot > Multi-Plots [GPLOT]

18. Exit ANSYS:


– Click the “QUIT” button in the Toolbar (or select: Utility Menu > Exit …)
• [OK]
– Or issue:
/EXIT,MODEL

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0 -- Part 1
Workshop Supplement

Lathe Cutter
Stress Analysis
Workshop 2A
2A. Stress Analysis
Lathe Cutter Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Description
• Solve a 3-D stress analysis of the
lathe cutter model below. Review
the results in the general
postprocessor by:
1) plotting the displacements

TO ANSYS
2) listing reaction forces

ANSYS 10.0-
3) plotting the von Mises stress
4) animating the von Mises stress

10.0
10.0-- Part
Resolve the solution using a
different set of constraints and

Part 1
compare the stress results to the
first solution.

1
2. Stress Analysis
Lathe Cutter Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Loads and Material Properties for the first solution:

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
2. Stress Analysis
Lathe Cutter Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Loads and Material Properties for the second solution:

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
2A. Stress Analysis
Lathe Cutter Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
1. Enter ANSYS in the working directory specified by your instructor using “cutter” as
the jobname.
2. Set the GUI Preferences to Structural:
– Main Menu > Preferences …
• Select “Structural”, then [OK]

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
2A. Stress Analysis
Lathe Cutter Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
3. Import the “cutter.igs” IGES file using the “Alternate no defeature” option:
– Utility Menu > File > Import > IGES …
• Select “ no defeaturing”, then [OK]
• Select “cutter.igs’, then [OK]

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
2A. Stress Analysis
Lathe Cutter Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
4. Scale the model by converting centimeters to inches:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Operate > Scale > Volumes +
• [Pick All]
– Enter 1/2.54 for RX, RY, and RZ
– Set IMOVE to “Moved”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
VLSCAL, ALL, , , 1/2.54, 1/2.54, 1/2.54,0,1

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
– Utility Menu > Plot > Volumes

Part 1
– Or issue:
VPLOT

1
2A. Stress Analysis
Lathe Cutter Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
5. Read input from “cutter-area.inp” to create a small area for applying pressure load at
tip:
– Utility Menu > File > Read Input from …
• Select “cutter-area.inp”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
/INPUT,cutter-area,inp

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
2A. Stress Analysis
Lathe Cutter Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
6. Specify the element type:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Element Type > Add/Edit/Delete …
• [Add ...]
– Select “Structural Solid” and “Tet 10node 92”, then [OK]
• [Close]
– Or issue:
ET,1,SOLID92

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
2A. Stress Analysis
Lathe Cutter Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
7. Define elastic moduli for material 1 to be 10e6 (Aluminum):
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Material Props > Material model > Structural > Linear > Elastic > Isotropic
• [OK]
• Set EX = 10e6 (Young’s modulus in psi for Aluminum)
• [OK]
– Or issue:
MP,EX,1,10e6

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
2A. Stress Analysis
Lathe Cutter Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
8. Activate smartsize meshing and mesh the model with tetrahedral elements:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > MeshTool …
• Activate “Smart Size”
• Set Smart Size level to 4
• [Mesh]
• [Pick All]
• [Close]
– Or issue:
SMRT,4

TO ANSYS
MSHAPE,1,3D
MSHKEY,0

ANSYS 10.0-
VMESH

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
2A. Stress Analysis
Lathe Cutter Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
9. Apply area “symmetry” constraint to restrain attachment region:
– Main Menu > Solution > Define Loads > Apply > -Structural- Displacement > -Symmetry B.C.- On Areas +
• Pick areas 18, 19, 25, and 26, then [OK]
– Or issue:
DA,18,SYMM
DA,19,SYMM
DA,25,SYMM
DA,26,SYMM

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
2A. Stress Analysis
Lathe Cutter Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
10. Apply pressure load at tip:
– Main Menu > Solution > Define Loads > Apply > Structural > Pressure > On Areas +
• Pick area 1, then [OK]
• VALUE = 10000
• [OK]
– Or issue:
SFA,1,1,PRES,10000

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
2A. Stress Analysis
Lathe Cutter Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
11. Save the database and obtain the solution:
– Click the “SAVE_DB” button in the Toolbar (or select: Utility Menu > File > Save as Jobname.db)
– Main Menu > Solution > -Solve- Current LS
• Review the “/STATUS Command” window and then close it
• [OK]
• [Close] - to close the yellow message window after the solution is completed
– Or issue:
/SOLU
SOLVE

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
2A. Stress Analysis
Lathe Cutter Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
12. Review the results:
12a. Plot displacements:
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Plot Results > -Contour Plot- Nodal Solu ...
• Select “DOF solution” and “Translation USUM”, select “Def + undef edge”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
/POST1
PLNSOL,U,SUM,2,1

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION ANSYS 10.0-
TO ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0-- Part 1
Workshop Supplement
2A. Stress Analysis
Lathe Cutter
2A. Stress Analysis
Lathe Cutter Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
12b. List reaction forces:
– Main Menu > General Postproc > List Results > Reaction Solu ...
• Select “All items”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
PRRSOL

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION ANSYS 10.0-
TO ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0-- Part 1
Workshop Supplement
2A. Stress Analysis
Lathe Cutter
2A. Stress Analysis
Lathe Cutter Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
12c. Plot von Mises stress:
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Plot Results > -Contour Plot- Nodal Solu ...
• Select “Stress” and “von Mises SEQV”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
PLNSOL,S,EQV

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION ANSYS 10.0-
TO ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0-- Part 1
Workshop Supplement
2A. Stress Analysis
Lathe Cutter
2A. Stress Analysis
Lathe Cutter Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
12d. Animate the von Mises stress:
– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Animate > Deformed Results ...
• Select “Stress” and “von Mises SEQV”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
PLNSOL,S,EQV
ANCNTR,10,0.5

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION ANSYS 10.0-
TO ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0-- Part 1
Workshop Supplement
2A. Stress Analysis
Lathe Cutter
2A. Stress Analysis
Lathe Cutter Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
13. Close the animation and delete the area symmetry constraints:
• [Close]
– Utility Menu > Plot > Areas
– Main Menu > Solution > Define Loads > Delete > Structural > Displacement > On Areas +
• Pick areas 18, 19, 25, and 26, then [OK]
• [OK]
– Or issue:
DADELE,18,ALL
DADELE,19,ALL

TO ANSYS
DADELE,25,ALL
DADELE,26,ALL

ANSYS 10.0-
14. Apply “ALL DOF” constraint to areas 18, 19, and 26:
– Main Menu > Solution > Define Loads > Apply > Structural > Displacement > On Areas +
• Pick areas 18, 19, and 26, then [OK]

10.0
10.0-- Part
• Select “All DOF” , then [OK]
– Or issue:
DA,18,ALL

Part 1
DA,19,ALL
DA,26,ALL

1
2A. Stress Analysis
Lathe Cutter Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
15. Save the database and obtain the solution:
– Pick the “SAVE_DB” button in the Toolbar (or select: Utility Menu > File > Save as Jobname.db)
– Main Menu > Solution > Solve > Current LS
• [OK]
• [Close]
– Or issue:
SAVE
/SOLU
SOLVE

TO ANSYS
16. Review the results:

ANSYS 10.0-
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Nodal Solu ...
• Select “Stress” and “von Mises SEQV”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
PLNSOL,S,EQV

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION ANSYS 10.0-
TO ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0-- Part 1
Workshop Supplement
2A. Stress Analysis
Lathe Cutter
2A. Stress Analysis
Lathe Cutter Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
17. Save and exit ANSYS:
– Pick the “QUIT” button from the Toolbar (or select: Utility Menu > File > Exit...)
• Select “Save Everything”
• [OK]
– Or issue:
FINISH
/EXIT,ALL

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Workshop 3

Thermal Analysis

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
Axisymmetric Pipe
with Fins

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
3. Thermal Analysis
Axisymmetric Pipe with Fins Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Description
• A pipe with cooling fins is to be analyzed for temperature
and thermal flux distributions under given loading
conditions (see next page).
• The model is axisymmetric. Also, only half the fin is
modeled, so the bottom of the model is a symmetry

TO ANSYS
boundary.

ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
3. Thermal Analysis
Axisymmetric Pipe with Fins Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Loads and Material Properties

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
3. Thermal Analysis
Axisymmetric Pipe with Fins Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
1. Enter ANSYS in the working directory specified by your instructor using “pipe-th” as
the jobname.
2. Set the GUI Preferences to Thermal:
– Main Menu > Preferences …
• Select “Thermal”, then [OK]

3. Read input from “pipe-th.inp” to create the 2-D axisymmetric model and specify mesh
divisions on lines:
– Utility Menu > File > Read Input from …

TO ANSYS
• Select “pipe-th.inp”, then [OK]
– Or issue:

ANSYS 10.0
/INPUT,pipe-th,inp

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
3. Thermal Analysis
Axisymmetric Pipe with Fins Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
4. Specify the element type to be PLANE55 and set keyopt(3)=axisymmetric:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Element Type > Add/Edit/Delete …
• [Add ...]
– Pick “Solid” and “Quad 4node 55”, then [OK]
• [Options ...]
– Set K3 = Axisymmetric, then [OK]
• [Close]
– Or issue:
ET,1,PLANE55, , , 1

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
3. Thermal Analysis
Axisymmetric Pipe with Fins Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
5. Read in material properties from the material library for 304 Stainless Steel:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Material Props > Material Library > Library Path ...
• Enter path for “Path for READING files” (eg. h:\ansys56\matlib) Ask your instructor for the
• [OK] path to the matlib directory.
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Material Props > Material Library > Import Library …
• Select “BIN”, then [OK]
• Select “Stl_AISI-304.BIN_MPL”, then [OK]
• Review the ansuitmp window
• Close the ansuitmp window

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
3. Thermal Analysis
Axisymmetric Pipe with Fins Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
6. Mesh the model using mapped meshing with 2-D quad elements:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > MeshTool …
• Pick [Set] under Size Controls: Global
• SIZE = 0.25/2, then [OK]
• Select “Mapped”, then [Mesh]
• [Pick All]
– Or issue:
MSHAPE,1,2D
MSHKEY,1

TO ANSYS
ESIZE,0.25/2
AMESH,ALL

ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
3. Thermal Analysis
Axisymmetric Pipe with Fins Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
7. Apply convection loads to the solid model lines:
– Main Menu > Solution > Define Loads > Apply > Thermal > Convection > On Lines +
• Pick lines 6, 7, and 11, then [Apply]
• Set VALI = 0.69e-4 and VAL2I = 70, then [OK]
• Pick line 4, then [Apply]
• Set VALI = 0.28e-3 and VAL2I = 450, then [OK]
– Utility Menu > Plot > Multi-Plots
– Or issue:
SFL,6,CONV,0.69e-4, ,70

TO ANSYS
SFL,7,CONV,0.69e-4, ,70
SFL,11,CONV,0.69e-4, ,70

ANSYS 10.0
SFL,4,CONV,0.28e-3, ,450
GPLOT

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
3. Thermal Analysis
Axisymmetric Pipe with Fins Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
8. Save the database and obtain the solution:
– Pick the “SAVE_DB” button in the Toolbar (or select: Utility Menu > File > Save as Jobname.db)
– Main Menu > Solution > Solve > Current LS
• Review the “/STATUS Command” window and then close it
• [OK]
• [Close] - to close the yellow message window after the solution is completed
– Or issue:
SAVE
/SOLU

TO ANSYS
SOLVE

ANSYS 10.0
9. Enter the general postprocessor and review the results:
– Main Menu > General Postproc >
– Or issue:
/POST1

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
3. Thermal Analysis
Axisymmetric Pipe with Fins Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
9a. Plot temperatures:
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Nodal Solu ...
• Pick “DOF solution” and “Temperature TEMP”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
PLNSOL,TEMP

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
3. Thermal Analysis
Axisymmetric Pipe with Fins Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
9b. Plot thermal flux:
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Nodal Solu ...
• Pick “Thermal gradient” and “Thermal gradient vector sum”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
PLNSOL,TF,SUM

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
3. Thermal Analysis
Axisymmetric Pipe with Fins Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
9c. Plot thermal gradient:
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Nodal Solu ...
• Pick “Thermal flux” and “Thermal flux vector sum”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
PLNSOL,TG,SUM

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
3. Thermal Analysis
Axisymmetric Pipe with Fins Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
10. Save and exit ANSYS:
– Pick the “QUIT” button from the Toolbar (or select: Utility Menu > File > Exit...)
• Select “Save Everything”
• [OK]
– Or issue:
FINISH
/EXIT,ALL

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Workshop 4

Thermal-Stress Analysis

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
Axisymmetric Pipe
with Fins

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
4. Thermal-Stress Analysis
Axisymmetric Pipe with Fins Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Description
• Continue the axisymmetric fin problem from Workshop 3 to
do a thermal-stress analysis. The pipe has an internal
pressure as shown on the next page. Also, since the top
line (at Y=1.0) represents a line of repetitive symmetry, we
will couple the UY degrees of freedom of all nodes along

TO ANSYS
that line.

ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
4. Thermal-Stress Analysis
Axisymmetric Pipe with Fins Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Loads and Material Properties

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
4. Thermal-Stress Analysis
Axisymmetric Pipe with Fins Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
1. Enter ANSYS in the working directory specified by your instructor using “pipe-th-str”
as the jobname.
2. Resume the pipe-th.db1 database file from Workshop 3 (or pipe-th.db1):
– Utility Menu > Resume from …
• Select “pipe-th.db1”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
RESUME,pipe-th,db

3. Set the GUI Preferences to Structural:

TO ANSYS
– Main Menu > Preferences …
• Select “Structural” and unselect “Thermal”, then [OK]

ANSYS 10.0
4. Change the title:
– Utility Menu > File > Change Title ...
• /TITLE = “2D AXI-SYMM THERMAL-STRESS ANALYSIS W/ INT. PRESS - ESIZE=0.125”
• [OK]

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
4. Thermal-Stress Analysis
Axisymmetric Pipe with Fins Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
5. Delete the convection loading on the solid model lines:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Loads > Define Loads > Delete > All Load Data > All SolidMod Lds …
• [OK]
– Or issue:
LSCLEAR,SOLID

6. Change the thermal elements to their corresponding structural elements:


– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Element Type > Switch Elem Type …
• Select “Thermal to Struc”, then [OK]

TO ANSYS
• Review the warning message, then [Close]
– Or issue:

ANSYS 10.0
ETCHG,TTS

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
4. Thermal-Stress Analysis
Axisymmetric Pipe with Fins Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
7. Set the element behavior to axisymmetric:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Element Type > Add/Edit/Delete …
• [Options ...]
– Set K3 = Axisymmetric, then [OK]
• [Close]
– Or issue:
KEYOPT, 1, 3, 1

8. Apply temperature load from thermal analysis in Workshop 3:


– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Loads > Define Loads > Apply > Structural > Temperature > From Therm Analy

TO ANSYS
..
• Select the “pipe-th.rth” results file, then [OK]

ANSYS 10.0
• Review the warning message, then [Close]
– Or issue:
LDREAD,TEMP, , , , ,pipe-th,rth

9. Apply symmetry boundary condition on lines at Y=0:

10.0 -- Part
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Loads > Define Loads > Apply > Structural > Displacement > Symmetry B.C.-
On Lines +
• Select lines 1 and 9, then [OK]
– Or issue:

Part 1
DL,1, ,SYMM
DL,9, ,SYMM

1
4. Thermal-Stress Analysis
Axisymmetric Pipe with Fins Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
10. Couple UY dof on nodes at Y=1:
10a. Select nodes at Y=1:
– Utility Menu > Select > Entities ...
• Select “Nodes” and “By Location”
• Select “Y coordinates”
• Set Min,Max to 1, then [OK]
– Or issue:
NSEL,S,LOC,Y,1

TO ANSYS
10b. Define a UY dof couple set on the select set of nodes:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Coupling / Ceqn > Couple DOFs +

ANSYS 10.0
• [Pick All]
• NSET = 1
• Set Lab = UY, then [OK]
– Utility Menu > Select > Everything

10.0 -- Part
– Or issue:
CP,1,UY,ALL
ALLSEL,ALL

Part 1
1
4. Thermal-Stress Analysis
Axisymmetric Pipe with Fins Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
11. Apply internal constant pressure to line:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Loads > Define Loads > Apply > Structural >Pressure > On Lines +
• Pick line 4, then [OK]
• VALUE = 1000, then [OK]
– Or issue:
SFL,4,PRES,1000

12. Verify temperature load by displaying body force loads:


– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Symbols

TO ANSYS
• Set Body Load Symbols = “Structural temps”, then [OK]
– Utility Menu > Plot > Elements

ANSYS 10.0
– Or issue:
/PBF,TEMP, ,1
EPLOT

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
4. Thermal-Stress Analysis
Axisymmetric Pipe with Fins Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
13. Save the database and obtain the solution:
– Pick the “SAVE_DB” button in the Toolbar (or select: Utility Menu > File > Save as Jobname.db)
– Main Menu > Solution > Solve > Current LS
• Review the “/STATUS Command” window and then close it
• [OK]
• [Close] - to close the yellow message window after the solution is completed
– Or issue:
SAVE
/SOLU

TO ANSYS
SOLVE

ANSYS 10.0
14. Enter the general postprocessor and review the results:
– Main Menu > General Postproc >
– Or issue:
/POST1

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
4. Thermal-Stress Analysis
Axisymmetric Pipe with Fins Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
14a. Plot displacement::
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Nodal Solu ...
• Pick “DOF solution” and “Translation USUM”, select “Def + undef edge”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
PLNSOL,U,SUM,2,1

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
4. Thermal-Stress Analysis
Axisymmetric Pipe with Fins Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
14b. Plot von Mises stress:
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Nodal Solu ...
• Pick “Stress” and “von Mises SEQV”, select “Def shape only”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
PLNSOL,S,EQV

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
4. Thermal-Stress Analysis
Axisymmetric Pipe with Fins Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
14c. Plot radial stress:
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Nodal Solu ...
• Pick “Stress” and “X-direction SX”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
PLNSOL,S,X

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
4. Thermal-Stress Analysis
Axisymmetric Pipe with Fins Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
14d. Expand the axisymmetric radial stress 90 degrees about Y axis and reflect about the
x-z plane:
– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Style > Symmetry Expansion > 2D Axi-Symmetric ...
• Pick “1/4 expansion” and set reflection to “yes”, then [OK]
– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Pan, Zoom, Rotate …
• [ISO]
– Or issue:
/EXPAND, 9,AXIS,,,10,,2,RECT,HALF,,0.00001
/VIEW,1,1,1,1

TO ANSYS
/REPLOT

ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
4. Thermal-Stress Analysis
Axisymmetric Pipe with Fins Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
4. Thermal-Stress Analysis
Axisymmetric Pipe with Fins Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
14e. Plot longitudinal (axial) stress:
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Nodal Solu ...
• Pick “Stress” and “Y-direction SY”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
PLNSOL,S,Y

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
4. Thermal-Stress Analysis
Axisymmetric Pipe with Fins Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
14f. Plot tangential (circumferential or hoop) stress:
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Nodal Solu ...
• Pick “Stress” and “Z-direction SZ”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
PLNSOL,S,Z

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
4. Thermal-Stress Analysis
Axisymmetric Pipe with Fins Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
15. Save and exit ANSYS:
– Pick the “QUIT” button from the Toolbar (or select: Utility Menu > File > Exit...)
• Select “Save Everything”
• [OK]
– Or issue:
FINISH
/EXIT,ALL

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0 -- Part 1
Workshop Supplement

Importing Geometry
Workshop 5
5. Importing Geometry
Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Description
• Import the following CAD files into ANSYS:

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0 -- Part 1
Workshop Supplement

Importing Geometry
Workshop 5A

IGES
5A. Importing Geometry
IGES Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
1. Enter ANSYS in the working directory specified by your instructor using “iges” as the
jobname.
2. Import the “bracket.igs” IGES file using the no defeature option:
– Utility Menu > File > Import > IGES…
• Select “No defeaturing”, then [OK]
• Select the “bracket.igs” file, then [OK]

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
5A. Importing Geometry
IGES Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
3. Save the database:
– Pick the “SAVE_DB” button in the Toolbar (or select: Utility Menu > File > Save as Jobname.db)

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0 -- Part 1
Workshop Supplement

Importing Geometry
Workshop 5B

SAT
5B. Importing Geometry
SAT Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
1. Clear the ANSYS database:
– Utility Menu > File > Clear & Start New …
• [OK], and then [Yes]

2. Change the jobname to “sat”:


– Utility Menu > File > Change Jobname …
• Enter “sat” for the new jobname, then [OK]

3. Import the “gear.sat” SAT file:


– Utility Menu > File > Import > SAT …

TO ANSYS
• Select the “gear.sat” file, then [OK]
– Or issue:

ANSYS 10.0
~SATIN,gear,sat,,SOLIDS,0

4. Turn “Normal Faceting” on:


– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Style > Solid Model Facets ...

10.0 -- Part
• Select “Normal Faceting”, then [OK]
– Utility Menu > Plot > Replot
– Or issue:
/FACET,NORML

Part 1
/REPLOT

1
5B. Importing Geometry
SAT Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
5. Save the database:
– Pick the “SAVE_DB” button in the Toolbar (or select: Utility Menu > File > Save as Jobname.db)

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0 -- Part 1
Workshop Supplement

SAT Assembly
Importing Geometry
Workshop 5C
5C. Importing Geometry
SAT Assembly Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
1. Clear the ANSYS database:
– Utility Menu > File > Clear & Start New …
• [OK], and then [Yes]

2. Change the jobname to “sat-assy”:


– Utility Menu > File > Change Jobname …
• Enter “sat-assy” for the new jobname, then [OK]

3. Import the “crank-assy.sat” SAT assembly file:


– Utility Menu > File > Import > SAT …

TO ANSYS
• Select the “crank-assy.sat” file, then [OK]
– Or issue:

ANSYS 10.0
~SATIN,crank-assy,sat,,SOLIDS,0

4. Turn “Normal Faceting” on:


– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Style > Solid Model Facets ...

10.0 -- Part
• Select “Normal Faceting”, then [OK]
– Utility Menu > Plot > Replot
– Or issue:
/FACET,NORML

Part 1
/REPLOT

1
5C. Importing Geometry
SAT Assembly Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
5. Turn volume numbering on:
– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Numbering …
• Turn volume numbers “on”, then [OK]
– Utility Menu > Plot > Volumes
– Or issue:
/PNUM,VOLU,1
VPLOT

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
5C. Importing Geometry
SAT Assembly Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
6. Save the database:
– Pick the “SAVE_DB” button in the Toolbar (or select: Utility Menu > File > Save as Jobname.db

7. Clear the ANSYS database:


– Utility Menu > File > Clear & Start New …
• [OK], and then [Yes]

8. Import the crank assembly by importing the individual sat files that make up the
assembly:
– Utility Menu > File > Import > SAT …

TO ANSYS
• Select the “knob.sat” file, then [OK]
– Utility Menu > File > Import > SAT …

ANSYS 10.0
• Select the “plate.sat” file, then [OK]
– Utility Menu > File > Import > SAT …
• Select the “socket.sat” file, then [OK]
– Or issue:

10.0 -- Part
~SATIN,knob,sat,,SOLIDS,0
~SATIN,plate,sat,,SOLIDS,0
~SATIN,socket,sat,,SOLIDS,0

Part 1
1
5C. Importing Geometry
SAT Assembly Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
9. Turn “Normal Faceting” on:
– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Style > Solid Model Facets ...
• Select “Normal Faceting”, then [OK]
– Utility Menu > Plot > Replot
– Or issue:
/FACET,NORML
/REPLOT

10. Turn volume numbering on:

TO ANSYS
– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Numbering …
• Turn volume numbers “on”, then [OK]

ANSYS 10.0
– Utility Menu > Plot > Volumes
– Or issue:
/PNUM,VOLU,1
VPLOT

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0 -- Part 1
Workshop Supplement

Parasolid
Importing Geometry
Workshop 5D
5D. Importing Geometry
Parasolid Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
1. Clear the ANSYS database:
– Utility Menu > File > Clear & Start New …
• [OK], and then [Yes]

2. Change the jobname to “para”:


– Utility Menu > File > Change Jobname …
• Enter “para” for the new jobname, then [OK]

3. Import the “bracket.x_t” Parasolid file:


– Utility Menu > File > Import > PARA …

TO ANSYS
• Select the “bracket.x_t” file, then [OK]
– Or issue:

ANSYS 10.0
~PARAIN,bracket,x_t,,SOLIDS,0,0

4. Turn “Normal Faceting” on:


– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Style > Solid Model Facets ...

10.0 -- Part
• Select “Normal Faceting”, then [OK]
– Utility Menu > Plot > Volumes
– Or issue:
/FACET,NORML

Part 1
VPLOT

1
5D. Importing Geometry
Parasolid Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
5. Save the database:
– Pick the “SAVE_DB” button in the Toolbar (or select: Utility Menu > File > Save as Jobname.db)

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Workshop 5E

Importing Geometry

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
Parasolid Assembly

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
5E. Importing Geometry
Parasolid Assembly Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
1. Clear the ANSYS database:
– Utility Menu > File > Clear & Start New …
• [OK], and then [Yes]

2. Change the jobname to “para-assy”:


– Utility Menu > File > Change Jobname …
• Enter “para-assy” for the new jobname, then [OK]

3. Import the “wheel-assy.x_t” parasolid assembly file:


– Utility Menu > File > Import > PARA …

TO ANSYS
• Select the “wheel-assy.x_t” file, then [OK]
– Or issue:

ANSYS 10.0
~PARAIN,wheel-assy,x_t,,SOLIDS,0,0

4. Turn “Normal Faceting” on:


– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Style > Solid Model Facets ...

10.0 -- Part
• Select “Normal Faceting”, then [OK]
– Utility Menu > Plot > Replot
– Or issue:
/FACET,NORML

Part 1
/REPLOT

1
5E. Importing Geometry
Parasolid Assembly Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
5. Turn volume numbering on:
– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Numbering …
• Turn volume numbers “on”, then [OK]
– Utility Menu > Plot > Volumes
– Or issue:
/PNUM,VOLU,1
VPLOT

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
5E. Importing Geometry
Parasolid Assembly Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
6. Save the database:
– Pick the “SAVE_DB” button in the Toolbar (or select: Utility Menu > File > Save as Jobname.db

7. Clear the ANSYS database:


– Utility Menu > File > Clear & Start New …
• [OK], and then [Yes]

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
5E. Importing Geometry
Parasolid Assembly Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
8. Import the wheel assembly by importing the individual parasolid files that make up
the assembly:
– Utility Menu > File > Import > PARA …
• Select the “base.x_t” file, then [OK]
– Utility Menu > File > Import > PARA …
• Select the “left-bracket.x_t” file, then [OK]
– Utility Menu > File > Import > PARA …
• Select the “right-bracket.x_t” file, then [OK]
– Utility Menu > File > Import > PARA …

TO ANSYS
• Select the “pin.x_t” file, then [OK]
– Utility Menu > File > Import > PARA …

ANSYS 10.0
• Select the “wheel.x_t” file, then [OK]
– Or issue:
~PARAIN,base,x_t,,SOLIDS,0,0
~PARAIN,left-bracket,x_t,,SOLIDS,0,0

10.0 -- Part
~PARAIN,right-bracket,x_t,,SOLIDS,0,0
~PARAIN,pin,x_t,,SOLIDS,0,0
~PARAIN,wheel,x_t,,SOLIDS,0,0

Part 1
1
5E. Importing Geometry
Parasolid Assembly Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
9. Turn “Normal Faceting” on:
– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Style > Solid Model Facets ...
• Select “Normal Faceting”, then [OK]
– Utility Menu > Plot > Replot
– Or issue:
/FACET,NORML
/REPLOT

10. Turn volume numbering on:

TO ANSYS
– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Numbering …
• Turn volume numbers “on”, then [OK]

ANSYS 10.0
– Utility Menu > Plot > Volumes
– Or issue:
/PNUM,VOLU,1
VPLOT

10.0 -- Part
11. Exit ANSYS:
– Pick the “QUIT” button in the Toolbar
• Select “Quit - No Save!”

Part 1
• [OK]
– Or issue:
FINISH $ /EXIT,NOSAVE

1
Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Workshop 6

Solid Modeling: Top-Down

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
Pillow Block

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
6. Solid Modeling: Top-Down
Pillow Block Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Description
• Build a half
Bushing, 0.85R Bracket
symmetry solid 1.5R, 0.75 thick

model of this pillow Counterbore


1.0R, 0.1875 deep
block.
• When you’re done, Web, 0.15 thick

save the database to

TO ANSYS
Base
Four 0.75D holes,
p-block.db. 0.75 offset
1.75 6x3x1

ANSYS 10.0-
from corner

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
All dimensions in inches

1
6. Solid Modeling: Top-Down
Pillow Block Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
1. Enter ANSYS in the working directory specified by your instructor using “p-block” as
the jobname.
2. Switch to isometric view:
– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Pan, Zoom, Rotate …
• [ISO]
– Or issue:
/VIEW,1,1,1,1

3. Create the base of the pillow block:

TO ANSYS
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Create > Volumes > Block > By Dimensions ...
• X1 = 0, X2 = 3, Y1 = 0, Y2 = 1, Z1 = 0, Z2 = 3, then [OK]

ANSYS 10.0-
– Or issue:
/PREP7
BLOCK,0,3,0,1,0,3

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
6. Solid Modeling: Top-Down
Pillow Block Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
3. Offset working plane to location X=2.25, Y=1.25, Z=.75:
– Utility Menu > WorkPlane > Offset WP by Increments …
• Set X,Y,Z Offsets = 2.25, 1.25, 0.75
• Set XY, YZ, ZX Angles = 0, -90, 0, then [OK]
– Or issue:
WPOFF, 2.25, 1.25, 0.75
WPROT, 0, -90, 0

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
6. Solid Modeling: Top-Down
Pillow Block Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
4. Create a solid cylinder having a diameter of 0.75 inches and a depth of 1.5 inches:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Create > Volumes> Cylinder > Solid Cylinder +
• Radius = 0.75/2
• Depth = -1.5, then [OK]
– Or issue:
CYL4, , ,0.75/2, , , ,-1.5

5. Copy the solid cylinder to new location with DZ=1.5:


– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Copy > Volumes +

TO ANSYS
• Pick the cylinder volume (Vol. Number 2), then [OK]
• DZ = 1.5, then [OK]

ANSYS 10.0-
– Or issue:
VGEN,2,2, , , , ,1.5, ,0

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
6. Solid Modeling: Top-Down
Pillow Block Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
6. Subtract the two solid cylinders from the base:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Operate > Booleans > Subtract > Volumes +
• Pick the base volume (Vol. 1), then [APPLY]
• Pick the two cylinder volumes (Vols. 2 and 3), then [OK]
– Or issue:
VSBV, 1, ALL

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
6. Solid Modeling: Top-Down
Pillow Block Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
7. Align working plane with the Global Cartesian origin:
– Utility Menu > WorkPlane > Align WP with > Global Cartesion
– Or issue:
WPCSYS,-1,0
VPLOT

8. Create the base of the bushing bracket:


– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Create > Volumes> Block > By 2 Corners & Z +
• WP X = 0

TO ANSYS
• WP Y = 1
• Width = 1.5

ANSYS 10.0-
• Height = 1.75
• Depth = 0.75, then [OK]
– Or issue:
BLC4,0,1,1.5,1.75,0.75

10.0
10.0-- Part
9. Offset working plane to the front face of the bushing bracket:
– Utility Menu > WorkPlane > Offset WP to > Keypoints +
• Pick keypoint at the top left corner of the front face, then [OK]

Part 1
– Or issue:
KWPAVE, 16

1
6. Solid Modeling: Top-Down
Pillow Block Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
10. Create the arch of the bushing bracket:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Create > Volumes > Cylinder > Partial Cylinder +
• WP X = 0
• WP Y = 0
• Rad-1 = 0
• Theta-1 = 0
• Rad-2 = 1.5
• Theta-2 = 90
• Depth = -0.75, then [OK]

TO ANSYS
– Or issue:
CYL4,0,0,0,0,1.5,90,-0.75

ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
6. Solid Modeling: Top-Down
Pillow Block Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
11. Create cylinders for the counterbore and the through hole in the bushing bracket:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling> Create > Volumes> Cylinder > Solid Cylinder +
• WP X = 0
• WP Y = 0
• Radius = 1
• Depth = -0.1875, then [Apply]
• WP X = 0
• WP Y = 0
• Radius = 0.85

TO ANSYS
• Depth = -2, then [OK]
– Or issue:

ANSYS 10.0-
CYL4,0,0,1, , , ,-0.1875
CYL4,0,0,0.85, , , ,-2

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
6. Solid Modeling: Top-Down
Pillow Block Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
12. Subtract the two solid cylinders to form the counterbore and bushing through-hole:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling> Operate > Booleans> Subtract > Volumes +
• Pick the two volumes that form the base and the arch of the bushing bracket
• [Apply]
• Pick the counterbore cylinder
• [Apply]
• Pick the same two base volumes
• [Apply]
• Pick the through-hole cylinder

TO ANSYS
• [OK]

ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
13. Merge coincident keypoints:

Part 1
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Numbering Ctrls > Merge Items …
• Set Label to “Keypoints”, then [OK]
– Or issue:

1
NUMMRG,KP
6. Solid Modeling: Top-Down
Pillow Block Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
14. Create the web:
14a. Create a keypoint in the middle of the front top edge of the base:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Create > Keypoints > KP between KPs +
• Pick the two upper front corner keypoints of the base, then [OK]
• RATI = 0.5, then [OK]
– Or issue:
KBETW,7,8,0,RATI,0.5

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
6. Solid Modeling: Top-Down
Pillow Block Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
14b. Create a triangular area:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Create > Areas > Arbitrary > Through KPs +
• Pick the 1st keypoint where the base of the bushing bracket intersects the base of the
pillow block at X=1.5
• Pick the 2nd keypoint where the base of the bushing bracket intersects the bottom arch
surface at X=1.5
• Pick the 3rd keypoint that was created in step 14a at X=1.5, Y=1, Z=3
• [Ok]
– Or issue:

TO ANSYS
A,14,15,9

ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
6. Solid Modeling: Top-Down
Pillow Block Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
14c. Extrude area along area normal:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Operate > Extrude > Areas > Along Normal +
• Pick the triangular area created in step 14b, then [OK]
• DIST = -0.15, then [OK]
– Or issue:
VOFFST,3,-0.15

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
6. Solid Modeling: Top-Down
Pillow Block Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
15. Glue the volumes together:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Operate > Booleans > Glue > Volumes +
• [Pick All]
– Or issue:
VGLUE,ALL

16. Turn volume numbers on and then plot volumes:


– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Numbering …
• Set Volume numbers on, then [OK]

TO ANSYS
– Or issue:
/PNUM,VOLU,1

ANSYS 10.0-
VPLOT

17. Save and exit ANSYS:


– Pick the “SAVE_DB” button in the Toolbar
– Pick the “QUIT” button in the Toolbar

10.0
10.0-- Part
• Select “Quit - No Save!”
• [OK]
– Or issue:

Part 1
FINISH
/EXIT,ALL

1
Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Workshop 7

Solid Modeling: Bottom-Up

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
Connecting Rod

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
7. Solid Modeling: Bottom-Up
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Description
• Build a solid model
of an automobile
Wrist pin end
connecting rod
C
using bottom-up Crank pin end
L

modeling 45o
o
techniques. 45

Spline through six control points


1.8

TO ANSYS
0.3
0.4R
0.5 0.4 0.33

ANSYS 10.0
0.28 C
L
1.4R
1.0R 0.7R

2.5

10.0 -- Part
3.25

4.0

4.75

Part 1
6.5

All dimensions in inches

1
7. Solid Modeling: Bottom-Up
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
1. Enter ANSYS in the working directory specified by your instructor using “c-rod” as
the jobname.
2. Create two circular areas:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Create > Areas > Circle > By Dimensions ...
• RAD1 = 1.4
• RAD2 = 1
• THETA1 = 0
• THETA2 = 180, then [Apply]
• Next, set THETA1 = 45, then [OK]

TO ANSYS
– Or issue:

ANSYS 10.0
/PREP7
PCIRC,1.4,1,0,180
PCIRC,1.4,1,45,180

3. Turn area numbering on:

10.0 -- Part
– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Numbering ...
• Set Area numbers on, then [OK]
– Or issue:

Part 1
/PNUM,AREA,1
APLOT

1
7. Solid Modeling: Bottom-Up
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
4. Create two rectangular areas:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Create > Areas > Rectangle > By Dimensions ...
• X1 = -0.3, X2 = 0.3, Y1 = 1.2, Y2 = 1.8, then [Apply]
• X1 = -1.8, X2 = -1.2, Y1 = 0, Y2 = 0.3, then [OK]
– Or issue:
RECTNG,-0.3,0.3,1.2,1.8
RECTNG,-1.8,-1.2,0,0.3

5. Offset working plane to XYZ location (X=6.5):

TO ANSYS
– Utility Menu > WorkPlane > Offset WP to > XYZ Locations +
• Enter 6.5 in the ANSYS Input window followed by Enter (carriage return)

ANSYS 10.0
• [OK]
– Or issue:
WPAVE,6.5

6. Set the active coordinate system to be the working plane coordinate system:

10.0 -- Part
– Utility Menu > WorkPlane > Change Active CS to > Working Plane
– Or issue:
CSYS,4

Part 1
1
7. Solid Modeling: Bottom-Up
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
7. Create two more circular areas:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Create > Areas > Circle > By Dimensions ...
• RAD1 = 0.7
• RAD2 = 0.4
• THETA1 = 0
• THETA2 = 180, then [Apply]
• Next, set THETA2 = 135, then [OK]
– Or issue:
/PREP7

TO ANSYS
PCIRC,0.7,0.4,0,180
PCIRC,0.7,0.4,0,135

ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
7. Solid Modeling: Bottom-Up
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
8. Issue separate Boolean overlaps on each area group:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Operate > Booleans > Overlap > Areas +
• First select the left group of areas, then [Apply]
• Next, select the right group of areas, then [OK]
– Or issue:
AOVLAP,1,2,3,4
AOVLAP,5,6

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
7. Solid Modeling: Bottom-Up
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
9. Set the active coordinate system to be global cartesian:
– Utility Menu > WorkPlane > Change Active CS to > Global Cartesian
– Or issue:
CSYS,0

10. Define four new keypoints:


– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Create > Keypoints > In Active CS …
• 1st KP, X=2.5, Y=0.5, then [Apply]
• 2nd KP, X=3.25, Y=0.4, then [Apply]

TO ANSYS
• 3rd KP, X=4, Y=0.33, then [Apply]
• 4th KP, X=4.75, Y=0.28, then [OK]

ANSYS 10.0
– Or issue:
K, ,2.5,0.5
K, ,3.25,0.4
K, ,4.0,0.33

10.0 -- Part
K, ,4.75,0.28

11. Set the active coordinate system to be global cylindrical:


– Utility Menu > WorkPlane > Change Active CS to > Global Cylindrical

Part 1
– Or issue:
CSYS,1

1
7. Solid Modeling: Bottom-Up
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
12. Create a single line from a spline fit to a series of keypoints:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Create > Lines > Splines > With Options > Spline thru KPs +
• Pick, in order, the six keypoints as shown in the graphics window below, then [OK]

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
7. Solid Modeling: Bottom-Up
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
12. (continued from previous page):
• XV1 = 1
• YV1 = 135
• XV6 = 1
• YV6 = 45
• [OK]

– Or issue:

TO ANSYS
BSPLIN,5,6,7,21,24,22,1,135,,1,45

ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
7. Solid Modeling: Bottom-Up
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
13. Create a straight line between keypoints 1 and 18:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Create > Lines > Lines > Straight Line +
• Pick the two keypoints as shown in the graphics window below, then [OK]
– Or issue:
LSTR, 1, 18

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
7. Solid Modeling: Bottom-Up
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
14. Turn line numbering on and plot lines:
– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Numbering ...
• Set Line numbers on, then [OK]
– Utility Menu > Plot > Lines
– Or issue:
/PNUM,LINE,1
LPLOT

15. Create a new area bounded by previously defined lines 6, 1, 7, 25:

TO ANSYS
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Create > Areas > Arbitrary > By Lines +
• Pick the four lines (6, 1, 7, and 25), then [OK]

ANSYS 10.0
– Or issue:
AL, 6, 1, 7, 25

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
7. Solid Modeling: Bottom-Up
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
16. Zoom in on the left portion of the connecting rod:
– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Pan, Zoom, Rotate …
• [Box Zoom]

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
7. Solid Modeling: Bottom-Up
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
17. Create three line fillets:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Create > Lines > Line Fillet +
• Pick lines 36 and 40, then [Apply]
• RAD = .25, then [Apply]
• Pick lines 40 and 31, then [Apply]
• [Apply]
• Pick lines 30 and 39, then [OK]
• [OK]
– Utility Menu > Plot > Lines

TO ANSYS
– Or issue:
LFILLT,36,40,0.25

ANSYS 10.0
LFILLT,40,31,0.25
LFILLT,30,39,0.25
LPLOT

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
7. Solid Modeling: Bottom-Up
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
18. Create three new areas bounded by the previously defined fillet lines:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Create > Areas >Arbitrary > By Lines +
• Pick lines 12, 10, and 13, then [Apply]
• Pick lines 17, 15, and 19, then [Apply]
• Pick lines 23, 21, and 24, then [OK]
– Utility Menu > Plot > Areas
– Or issue:
AL, 12, 10, 13
AL, 17, 15, 19

TO ANSYS
AL, 23, 21, 24
APLOT

ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
7. Solid Modeling: Bottom-Up
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
19. Add all areas together to form one single area:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Operate > Add > Areas +
• [Pick All]
– Or issue:
AADD,ALL

20. Fit the entire model within the graphics window:


– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Pan, Zoom, Rotate …
• [Fit]

TO ANSYS
21. Turn off line and area numbering:
– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Numbering ...

ANSYS 10.0
• Set Line and Area numbers off, then [OK]
– Utility Menu > Plot > Areas
– Or issue:
/PNUM,LINE,0

10.0 -- Part
/PNUM,AREA,0
APLOT

Part 1
1
7. Solid Modeling: Bottom-Up
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
22. Set the active coordinate system to be global cartesian:
– Utility Menu > WorkPlane > Change Active CS to > Global Cartesian
– Or issue:
CSYS,0

23. Reflect the area about the X-Z plane (in Y direction):
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Reflect > Areas +
• [Pick All]
• Select X-Z plane, then [OK]

TO ANSYS
– Or issue:
ARSYM,Y,13

ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
7. Solid Modeling: Bottom-Up
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
24. Add all areas together to form one single area:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Operate >Booleans > Add > Areas +
• [Pick All]
– Or issue:
AADD,ALL

25. Turn working plane off:


– Utility Menu > WorkPlane > Display Working Plane
– Or issue:

TO ANSYS
WPSTYLE

ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
7. Solid Modeling: Bottom-Up
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
26. Save and exit ANSYS:
– Pick the “SAVE_DB” button in the Toolbar
– Pick the “QUIT” button in the Toolbar
• Select “Quit - No Save!”
• [OK]
– Or issue:
FINISH
/EXIT,ALL

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0 -- Part 1
Workshop Supplement

Pillow Block
Workshop 8A

Meshing
8A. Meshing
Pillow Block Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Description
• Mesh the pillow block that was created in workshop 6.
• Use both free meshing and sweep meshing techniques.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
8A. Meshing
Pillow Block Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
1. Enter ANSYS in the working directory specified by your instructor using “p-block-
mesh” as the jobname.
2. Resume the “p-block.db” database file created in workshop 6 (or the p-block.db1):
– Utility Menu > File > Resume from …
• Select the “p-block.db” (or the “p-block.db1”) database file, then [OK]
– Or issue:
RESUME,p-block,db (or RESUME,p-block,db1)

3. Enter the preprocessor and specify the element type to be SOLID45:

TO ANSYS
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Element Type > Add/Edit/Delete …
• [Add ...]

ANSYS 10.0
– Choose “Structural Solid” and “Brick 8node 45”, then [OK]
• [Close]
– Or issue:
/PREP7

10.0 -- Part
ET,1,SOLID45

Part 1
1
001289
30 Nov 1999
W8-3
8A. Meshing
Pillow Block Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
4. Activate smartsize meshing and free mesh the model with tetrahedral elements:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > MeshTool …
• Activate “Smart Size”
• Set Smart Size level to 4
• [Mesh]
• [Pick All]
• [Close]
– Or issue:
SMRT,4

TO ANSYS
MSHAPE,1,3D
MSHKEY,0

ANSYS 10.0
VMESH,ALL

10.0 -- Part
5. Save the meshed model:
– Utility Menu > File > Save as …
• Enter “p-block-mesh-free.db” as the database name, then [OK]

Part 1
– Or issue:
SAVE,p-block-mesh-free,db

1
8A. Meshing
Pillow Block Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
6. Sweep mesh the model:
6a. Clear the free mesh:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > MeshTool …
• [Clear]
• [Pick All]
– Utility Menu > Plot > Volumes
– Or issue:
VCLEAR,ALL

TO ANSYS
VPLOT

ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
8A. Meshing
Pillow Block Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
6b. Divide the base volume in two in order to make it topologically consistent for sweep
meshing:
– Utility Menu > WorkPlane > Align WP with > Keypoints +
• Pick the three keypoints displayed in the graphics window below, then [OK]
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Operate > Booleans > Divide > Volu by WrkPlane +
• Pick the base volume, then [OK]
– Utility Menu > WorkPlane > Display Working Plane
– Utility Menu > Plot > Volumes
– Or issue:

TO ANSYS
KWPLAN,-1, 12, 14, 11
VSBW,7

ANSYS 10.0
WPSTYLE
VPLOT

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
8A. Meshing
Pillow Block Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
6c. Activate “tet-mesh” for volumes that cannot be swept:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > Mesh > Volume Sweep > Sweep Opts ...
• Select “Tet mesh in nonsweepable volumes”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
EXTOPT,VSWE,TETS,ON

6d. Leave smartsize level at 4 and set global element size to 0.125, then sweep mesh the
model with brick/tet elements:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > MeshTool …
• Pick [Set] under Size Controls: Global

TO ANSYS
• Set SIZE = 0.125, then [OK]

ANSYS 10.0
• Select “Hex” and “Sweep”, and leave the default “Auto Src/Trg” setting active
• [Sweep]
• [Pick All]
• [Yes] - to mesh volume 6 with tetrahedra elements

10.0 -- Part
– Or issue:
SMRT,2
VSWEEP,ALL

Part 1
1
8A. Meshing
Pillow Block Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
6e. Save the meshed model:
– Utility Menu > File > Save as …

Part 1
• Enter “p-block-mesh-sweep.db” as the database name, then [OK]
– Or issue:
SAVE,p-block-mesh-sweep,db

1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0 -- Part 1
Workshop Supplement

Connecting Rod
Workshop 8B

Meshing
8B. Meshing
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Description
• Mesh the connecting rod that was created in workshop 7.
• Then extrude the area with the mesh to create a 3-D mesh.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
8B. Meshing
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
1. Enter ANSYS in the working directory specified by your instructor using “c-rod-
mesh” as the jobname.
or
Clear the ANSYS database and change the jobname to be “c-rod-mesh”:
– Utility Menu > File > Clear & Start New ...
– Utility Menu > File > Change Jobname ...

2. Resume the “c-rod.db” database file created in workshop 7 (or c-rod.db1):


– Utility Menu > File > Resume from …

TO ANSYS
• Select the “c-rod.db” (or “c-rod.db1”) database file, then [OK]
– Or issue:

ANSYS 10.0
RESUME,c-rod,db (or RESUME,c-rod,db1)

3. Enter the preprocessor and specify the element type to be PLANE82:


– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Element Type > Add/Edit/Delete …

10.0 -- Part
• [Add ...]
– Choose “Structural Solid” and “Quad 4node 42”, then [OK]
• [Close]

Part 1
– Or issue:
/PREP7
ET,1,PLANE42

1
8B. Meshing
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
4. Set element size to 0.2 and free mesh the model with quad elements:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor >Meshing > MeshTool …
• Pick [Set] under Size Controls: Global
• SIZE = 0.2
• [OK]
• [Mesh]
• [Pick All]
– Or issue:
ESIZE,0.2

TO ANSYS
MSHAPE,0,2D
MSHKEY,0

ANSYS 10.0
AMESH,ALL

10.0 -- Part
5. Save the meshed model:
– Utility Menu > File > Save as …
• Enter “c-rod-mesh-quad.db” as the database name, then [OK]

Part 1
– Or issue:
SAVE,c-rod-mesh-quad,db

1
8B. Meshing
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
6. Extrude the meshed area along its normal to create a 3D brick mesh model:
6a. Add a 3-D brick element:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Element Type > Add/Edit/Delete …
• [Add ...]
– Choose “Structural Solid” and “Brick 8node 45”, then [OK]
• [Close]
– Or issue:
ET,2,SOLID45

TO ANSYS
6b. Set element divisions along extrusion and then extrude the area:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Operate > Extrude > Elem Ext Opts ...

ANSYS 10.0
• VAL1 = 3
• [OK]
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Operate > Extrude > Areas >Along Normal +
• Pick area number 2, then [OK]

10.0 -- Part
• DIST = 0.5, then [OK]
– Or issue:
EXTOPT,ESIZE,3

Part 1
VOFFST,2,0.5

1
8B. Meshing
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
6c. Delete the 2-D PLANE82 elements:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > MeshTool ...
• Select “Areas” under Mesh:
• [Clear]
• [Pick All]
– Or issue:
ACLEAR,ALL

7. Change to isometric view:

TO ANSYS
– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Pan, Zoom, Rotate …
• [ISO]

ANSYS 10.0
– Or issue:
/VIEW,1,1,1,1
EPLOT

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
8B. Meshing
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
8. Save the meshed model:
– Utility Menu > File > Save as …

Part 1
• Enter “c-rod-mesh-brick.db” as the database name, then [OK]
– Or issue:
SAVE,c-rod-mesh-brick,db

1
8B. Meshing
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
9. Redo the exercise but replace PLANE82 elements with MESH200 elements. Using
MESH200 elements eliminates the need to delete/unselect the 2-D elements from the
3-D meshed model:
9a. Resume the “c-rod.db” database file created in workshop 7 (or c-rod.db1):
– Utility Menu > File > Resume from …
• Select the “c-rod.db” (or “c-rod.db1”) database file, then [OK]
– Or issue:
RESUME,c-rod,db (or RESUME,c-rod,db1)

TO ANSYS
9b. Enter the preprocessor and specify the element type to be MESH200 and set
keyopt(1)=“QUAD 8-NODE”:

ANSYS 10.0
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Element Type > Add/Edit/Delete …
• [Add ...]
– Choose “Not Solved” and “Mesh Facet 200”, then [OK]
• [Options ...]

10.0 -- Part
• Set K1 to “QUAD 8-NODE”, then [OK]
• [Close]
– Or issue:

Part 1
/PREP7
ET,1,MESH200
KEYOPT,1,1,7

1
8B. Meshing
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
9c. Set element size to 0.2 and free mesh the model with quad elements:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > MeshTool …
• Pick [Set] under Size Controls: Global
• SIZE = 0.2
• [OK]
• [Mesh]
• [Pick All]
– Or issue:
ESIZE,0.2

TO ANSYS
MSHAPE,0,2D
MSHKEY,0

ANSYS 10.0
AMESH,ALL

9d. Define element type 2 to be SOLID45:


– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Element Type > Add/Edit/Delete …

10.0 -- Part
• [Add ...]
– Choose “Structural Solid” and “Brick 8node 45”, then [OK]
• [Close]

Part 1
– Or issue:
ET,2,SOLID95

1
8B. Meshing
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
9e. Set element divisions along extrusion and then extrude the area:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Operate > Extrude > Elem Ext Opts ...
• VAL1 = 3
• [OK]
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Operate > Extrude > Areas > Along Normal +
• Pick area number 2, then [OK]
• DIST = 0.5, then [OK]
– Or issue:
EXTOPT,ESIZE,3

TO ANSYS
VOFFST,2,0.5

ANSYS 10.0
9f. Change to isometric view:
– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Pan, Zoom, Rotate …
• [ISO]
– Or issue:

10.0 -- Part
/VIEW,1,1,1,1
EPLOT

Part 1
1
8B. Meshing
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
9g. Save the meshed model:
– Utility Menu > File > Save as …

Part 1
• Enter “c-rod-mesh-brick2.db” as the database name, then [OK]
– Or issue:
SAVE,c-rod-mesh-brick2,db

1
8B. Meshing
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
10. Use VSWEEP to create a 3-D brick element mesh :
10a. Resume the “c-rod.db” database file created in workshop 7 (or c-rod.db1):
– Utility Menu > File > Resume from …
• Select the “c-rod.db” (or “c-rod.db1”) database file, then [OK]
– Or issue:
RESUME,c-rod,db (or RESUME,c-rod,db1)

10b. Enter the preprocessor and specify the element type to be SOLID45:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Element Type > Add/Edit/Delete …

TO ANSYS
• [Add ...]
– Choose “Structural Solid” and “Brick 8node 45”, then [OK]

ANSYS 10.0
• [Close]
– Or issue:
/PREP7
ET,1,SOLID45

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
8B. Meshing
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
10c. Extrude the area to create the volume:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Operate > Extrude > Areas > Along Normal +
• Pick area number 2, then [OK]
• DIST = 0.5, then [OK]
– Or issue:
VOFFST,2,0.5

10d. Change to isometric view:


– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Pan, Zoom, Rotate …

TO ANSYS
• [ISO]
– Or issue:

ANSYS 10.0
/VIEW,1,1,1,1
VPLOT

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
8B. Meshing
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
10e. Mesh the volume using VSWEEP:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > MeshTool ...
• Pick [Set] under Size Controls: Global
• SIZE = 0.2
• [OK]
• Select “Hex” and “Sweep”, and leave the default “Auto Src/Trg” setting
• [Sweep]
• [Pick All]
– Or issue:

TO ANSYS
ESIZE,0.2
VSWEEP,ALL

ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
8B. Meshing
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
10f. Save the meshed model:
– Utility Menu > File > Save as …
• Enter “c-rod-mesh-sweep.db” as the database name, then [OK]
– Or issue:
SAVE,c-rod-mesh-sweep,db

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0 -- Part 1
Workshop Supplement

Cotter Pin
Workshop 8C

Meshing
8C. Meshing
Cotter Pin Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Description
• Mesh the cotter pin model below using the volume sweep option.
The database already has 3-D element type (SOLID45) defined
along with some line divisions.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
8C. Meshing
Cotter Pin Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
1. Enter ANSYS in the working directory specified by your instructor using “cotter-pin”
as the jobname.
or
Clear the ANSYS database and change the jobname to be “cotter-pin”:
– Utility Menu > File > Clear & Start New ...
– Utility Menu > File > Change Jobname ...

2. Resume the “cotter.db1” database file:


– Utility Menu > File > Resume from …

TO ANSYS
• Select the “cotter.db1” database file, then [OK]
– Or issue:

ANSYS 10.0
RESUME,cotter,db1

3. Enter the preprocessor and bring up the MeshTool:


– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > MeshTool …

10.0 -- Part
• Select “Hex” and “Sweep”, and leave the default “Auto Src/Trg” setting active
• [Sweep]
• [Pick All]

Part 1
– Or issue:
VSWEEP,ALL

1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0 -- Part 1
Workshop Supplement
Cotter pin
8C. Meshing
8C. Meshing
Cotter pin Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
4. Define element size on source and target areas:
– Utility Menu > Plot > Areas
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > Size Cntrls > Manual Size > Areas > Picked Areas +
• Pick the two areas displayed in the graphics window below, then [OK]
• SIZE = 0.01
• [OK]
– Or issue:
APLOT
AESIZE,21,0.01

TO ANSYS
AESIZE,40,0.01

ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
8C. Meshing
Cotter pin Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
5. Mesh the model again using VSWEEP:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor >Meshing > MeshTool …
• Select “Hex” and “Sweep”, and leave the default “Auto Src/Trg” setting active
• [Sweep]
• [Pick All]
• [OK]
– Or issue:
VSWEEP,ALL

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
8C. Meshing
Cotter pin Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
6. Save the meshed model:
– Utility Menu > File > Save as …
• Enter “cotter-pin-mesh.db” as the database name, then [OK]
– Or issue:
SAVE,cotter-pin-mesh,db

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0 -- Part 1
Workshop Supplement

Wheel
Workshop 8D

Meshing
8D. Meshing
Wheel Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Description
• Mesh the wheel model below using mixed free and mapped
meshing.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
8D. Meshing
Wheel Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
1. Enter ANSYS in the working directory specified by your instructor using “wheelb-3d”
as the jobname.
or
Clear the ANSYS database and change the jobname to be “wheelb-3d”:
– Utility Menu > File > Clear & Start New ...
– Utility Menu > File > Change Jobname ...

2. Resume the “wheelb.db1” database file:


– Utility Menu > File > Resume from …

TO ANSYS
• Select the “wheelb.db1” database file, then [OK]
– Or issue:

ANSYS 10.0
RESUME,wheelb,db1

3. Enter the preprocessor and divide volume by working plane:


– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Operate > Booleans > Divide > Volu by WrkPlane +

10.0 -- Part
• [Pick All]
– Utility Menu > Plot > Volumes
– Or issue:

Part 1
/PREP7
VSBW,1
VPLOT

1
8D. Meshing
Wheel Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
4. Offset working plane to keypoint number 19:
– Utility Menu > WorkPlane > Offset WP to > Keypoints +
• Select keypoint number 19 as shown in the graphics window below, then [OK]
– Or issue:
KWPAVE,19

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
8D. Meshing
Wheel Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
5. Divide volume by working plane:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Operate > Booleans > Divide > Volu by WrkPlane +
• [Pick All]
– Utility Menu > Plot > Volumes
– Or issue:
VSBW,4
VPLOT

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
8D. Meshing
Wheel Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
6. Turn off working plane and set global element size to 0.25:
– Utility Menu > WorkPlane > Display Working Plane
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > MeshTool …
• Pick [Set] under Size Controls: Global
• SIZE = 0.25
• [OK]
– Or issue:
WPSTYLE
ESIZE,0.25

TO ANSYS
7. Map mesh the four outer volumes with SOLID45 elements (TYPE 1):

ANSYS 10.0
– Main Menu > Preprocessor >Meshing > MeshTool …
• Select “Hex” and “Mapped” under Shape:
• [Mesh]
• Pick the four outer volumes (vol. numbers 1, 2, 3, and 5)

10.0 -- Part
• [OK]
– Or issue:
MSHAPE,0,3D

Part 1
MSHKEY,1
VMESH,1,3,1
VMESH,5

1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0 -- Part 1
Workshop Supplement
8D. Meshing
Wheel
8D. Meshing
Wheel Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
8. Free mesh the inner volume using SOLID95 elements (TYPE 2):
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > MeshTool …
• Pick [Set] under Element Attributes:
• TYPE = “2 SOLID45”, then [OK]
• Pick [Set] under Size Controls: Global
• SIZE = 0.2
• [OK]
• Select “Tet” and “Free” under Shape:
• [Mesh]

TO ANSYS
• Pick the inner volume (vol. number 6)
• [OK]

ANSYS 10.0
– Or issue:
TYPE,2
ESIZE,0.2
MSHAPE,1,3D

10.0 -- Part
MSHKEY,0
VMESH,6

Part 1
1
8D. Meshing
Wheel Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
9. Convert the SOLID95 tet elements into SOLID92 tet elements:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > Modify Mesh > Change Tets ...
• [OK]
– Or issue:
TCHG,95,92

10. Select and plot the SOLID45 pyramid shaped elements:


– Utility Menu > Select > Entities ...
• Select “Elements”, “By Attributes”, “Elem type num”

TO ANSYS
• Set Min,Max,Inc = 2
• [OK]

ANSYS 10.0
– Utility Menu > Plot > Elements
– Or issue:
ESEL,S,TYPE,,2
EPLOT

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
8D. Meshing
Wheel Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
11. Select everything and save the database:
– Utility Menu > Select > Everything
– Utility Menu > Plot > Elements
– Utility Menu > File > Save as …
• Enter “wheelb-3d-mesh.db” as the database name, then [OK]
– Or issue:
ALLSEL,ALL
EPLOT
SAVE,wheelb-3d-mesh,db

TO ANSYS
11. Exit ANSYS:

ANSYS 10.0
– Pick the “QUIT” button in the
Toolbar
• Select “Quit - No Save!”
• [OK]

10.0 -- Part
– Or issue:
FINISH
/EXIT,NOSAVE

Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0 -- Part 1
Workshop Supplement

Workshop 9A

Select Logic

Silo
9A. Select Logic
Silo Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Description
• Using select logic, assign solid model attributes to the silo model
below and then mesh it. The model consists of both shells and
beams.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
9A. Select Logic
Silo Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Element types:

SHELL63 (TYPE 1) throughout


cylinder and cone areas.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
BEAM4 (TYPE 2) stiffeners for all lines
in cone.

Part 1
1
9A. Select Logic
Silo Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Materials:

Concrete (MAT 2) for cylinder areas.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
Steel (MAT 1) for cone areas and

10.0 -- Part
stiffeners.

Part 1
1
9A. Select Logic
Silo Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Real Constants:

Shell thickness = 1.0 (REAL 1) for


cylinder.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
Shell thickness = 0.375 (REAL 2) for
upper part of cone.

10.0 -- Part
Shell thickness = 0.25 (REAL 3) for
lower part of cone.

Part 1
Beam constants (REAL 4) for
stiffeners.

1
9A. Select Logic
Silo Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
1. Enter ANSYS in the working directory specified by your instructor using “silo” as the
jobname.
2. Resume the “silo.db1” database file:
– Utility Menu > File > Resume from …
• Select the “silo.db1” database file, then [OK]
– Or issue:
RESUME,silo,db1

3. Bring up the “Select Entities” menu and select the cylinder areas:

TO ANSYS
– Utility Menu > Select > Entities …
• Select “Areas”, “By Location”, “Z coordinates”

ANSYS 10.0
• Min,Max = 0,120
• [Apply]
– Or issue:
ASEL,S,LOC,Z,0,120

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
9A. Select Logic
Silo Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
4. Assign solid model attributes to the cylinder areas:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > MeshTool …
• Select “Areas” under Element Attributes:, then [Set]
• [Pick All]
• MAT = 2
• REAL = 1
• TYPE = “1 SHELL63”
• [OK]
– Or issue:

TO ANSYS
AATT, 2, 1, 1

ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
9A. Select Logic
Silo Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
5. Select the areas of the upper part of the cone and assign the solid model attributes:
– Utility Menu > Select > Entities …
• Select “Areas”, “By Location”, “Z coordinates”
• Min,Max = -30,0
• [Apply]
• [Replot]
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > MeshTool …
• Select “Areas” under Element Attributes:, then [Set]
• [Pick All]

TO ANSYS
• MAT = 1
• REAL = 2

ANSYS 10.0
• TYPE = “1 SHELL63”
• [OK]
– Or issue:
ASEL,S,LOC,Z,-30,0

10.0 -- Part
APLOT
AATT, 1, 2, 1

Part 1
1
9A. Select Logic
Silo Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
6. Select the areas of the lower part of the cone and assign the solid model attributes:
– Utility Menu > Select > Entities …
• Select “Areas”, “By Location”, “Z coordinates”
• Min,Max = -60,-30
• [Apply]
• [Replot]
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > MeshTool …
• Select “Areas” under Element Attributes:, then [Set]
• [Pick All]

TO ANSYS
• MAT = 1
• REAL = 3

ANSYS 10.0
• TYPE = “1 SHELL63”
• [OK]
– Or issue:
ASEL,S,LOC,Z,-60,-30

10.0 -- Part
APLOT
AATT, 1, 3, 1

Part 1
1
9A. Select Logic
Silo Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
7. Select the lines in the cone and assign the solid model attributes:
– Utility Menu > Select > Entities …
• Select “Lines”, “By Location”, “Z coordinates”
• Min,Max = -60,0
• [Apply]
– Utility Menu > Plot > Lines
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > MeshTool …
• Select “Lines” under Element Attributes:, then [Set]
• [Pick All]

TO ANSYS
• MAT = 1
• REAL = 4

ANSYS 10.0
• TYPE = “2 BEAM4”
• [OK]
– Or issue:
LSEL,S,LOC,Z,-60,0

10.0 -- Part
LPLOT
LATT, 1, 4, 2

Part 1
1
9A. Select Logic
Silo Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
8. Mesh the lines with BEAM4 elements:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > MeshTool …
• Select “Lines” under Mesh:, then [Mesh]
• [Pick All]
– Or issue:
LMESH,ALL

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
9A. Select Logic
Silo Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
9. Select everything and mesh the areas with SHELL63 elements:
– Utility Menu > Select > Everything
– Utility Menu > Plot > Areas
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > MeshTool …
• Select “Areas” under Mesh:, then [Mesh]
• [Pick All]
– Or issue:
ALLSEL,ALL
APLOT

TO ANSYS
AMESH,ALL

ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
9A. Select Logic
Silo Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
10. Turn on material numbers for “Elem / Attrib numbering” and plot the elements:
– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Numbering ...
• Elem / Attrib numbering = “Material numbers”
• [OK]
– Or issue:
/PNUM,MAT,1
EPLOT

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
9A. Select Logic
Silo Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
11. Turn on real constant numbers for “Elem / Attrib numbering” and plot the elements:
– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Numbering ...
• Elem / Attrib numbering = “Real const num”
• [OK]
– Or issue:
/PNUM,REAL,1
EPLOT

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
9A. Select Logic
Silo Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
12. Turn on element type numbers for “Elem / Attrib numbering” and plot the elements:
– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Numbering ...
• Elem / Attrib numbering = “Element type num”
• [OK]
– Or issue:
/PNUM,TYPE,1
EPLOT

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
9A. Select Logic
Silo Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
13. Save the meshed model and exit ANSYS:
– Utility Menu > File > Save as …
• Enter “silo-mesh.db” as the database name, then [OK]
– Pick the “QUIT” button in the Toolbar
• Select “Quit - No Save!”
• [OK]
– Or issue:
SAVE,silo-mesh,db
FINISH

TO ANSYS
/EXIT,NOSAVE

ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0 -- Part 1
Workshop Supplement

Impeller Extrusion
Workshop 9B

Select Logic
9B. Select Logic
Impeller Extrusion Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Description
• Using select logic, extrude a set of 2-D quad meshed areas to form
a 3-D brick meshed volume of an impeller.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
9B. Select Logic
Impeller Extrusion Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
1. Enter ANSYS in the working directory specified by your instructor using “impeller” as
the jobname.
2. Resume the “impeller.db1” database file that contains a 2-D quad meshed model:
– Utility Menu > File > Resume from …
• Select the “impeller.db1” database file, then [OK]
– Or issue:
RESUME,impeller,db1

3. Plot elements along with the solid model entities:

TO ANSYS
– Utility Menu > Plot > Multi-Plots
– Or issue:

ANSYS 10.0
GPLOT

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
9B. Select Logic
Impeller Extrusion Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
4. Add element type 2 as SOLID45 and set the default TYPE number to 2:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Element Type > Add/Edit/Delete …
• [Add …]
• Select “Structural Solid” and “Brick 8node 45”, then [OK]
• [Close]
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > MeshTool …
• Pick [Set] under Element Attributes: Global
• Set TYPE = “2 SOLID45”, then [OK]
– Or issue:

TO ANSYS
/PREP7
ET,2,SOLID45

ANSYS 10.0
TYPE,2

5. Define extrude options and extrude all areas along line number 1:
5a. Set the number of element divisions to 2 for extrude operation:

10.0 -- Part
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Operate > Extrude > Elem Ext Opts …
• Set VAL1 = 2
• [OK]

Part 1
– Or issue:
EXTOPT,ESIZE,2

1
9B. Select Logic
Impeller Extrusion Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
5b. Extrude all areas along line 1 and then plot elements:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Operate > Extrude > Areas> Along Lines +
• [Pick All]
• Enter “1” in the ANSYS Input window followed by [Enter]
• [OK]
– Utility Menu > Plot > Elements
– Or issue:
EXTOPT,ESIZE,2
VDRAG,ALL,,,,,,1

TO ANSYS
EPLOT

ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
9B. Select Logic
Impeller Extrusion Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
6. Extrude all fin surface areas (18) and inner ring surface areas (2) along line 2:
6a. Set the number of element divisions to 9 for extrude operation:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Operate > Extrude > Elem Ext Opts …
• Set VAL1 = 9
• [OK]
– Or issue:
EXTOPT,ESIZE,9

6b. Select all areas that lie on the plane Z=0.25:

TO ANSYS
– Utility Menu > Select > Entities ...
• Select “Areas”, “By Location”, and “Z coordinates”

ANSYS 10.0
• Set Min,Max = 0.25
• [OK]
– Utility Menu > Plot > Areas
– Or issue:

10.0 -- Part
ASEL,S,LOC,Z,0.25
APLOT

Part 1
1
9B. Select Logic
Impeller Extrusion Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
6c. Select the 18 fin surfaces and the 2 ring surfaces that lie on the plane Z=0.25:
– Utility Menu > Select > Entities ...
• Select “Areas”, “By Num/Pick”, and “Reselect”
• [OK]
• Pick the 18 fin surfaces and the 2 ring surfaces
• [OK]
– Utility Menu > Plot > Areas

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
9B. Select Logic
Impeller Extrusion Workshop Supplement

6d. Extrude the fin and ring surface areas along line 2:

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Operate > Extrude > Areas > Along Lines +
• [Pick All]
• Enter “2” in the ANSYS Input window followed by [Enter], then [OK]
• [OK]
– Utility Menu > Select > Everything
– Utility Menu > Plot > Elements
– Or issue:
VDRAG,ALL,,,,,,2
ALLSEL,ALL

TO ANSYS
EPLOT

ANSYS 10.0
7. Save the meshed model and exit ANSYS:
– Utility Menu > File > Save as …
• Enter “impeller-mesh.db” as the
database name, then [OK]

10.0 -- Part
– Pick the “QUIT” button in the Toolbar
• Select “Quit - No Save!”
• [OK]

Part 1
– Or issue:
SAVE,impeller-mesh,db
FINISH $ /EXIT,NOSAVE

1
Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Workshop 10

APDL Basics

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
2-D Bracket
using Parameters

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
10. APDL Basics
2-D Bracket using Parameters Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Description
• Build and mesh the 2-D bracket shown below using parameters.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
10. APDL Basics
2-D Bracket using Parameters Workshop Supplement

d1

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
(6 in)

width/2
(1 in)
width
(2 in)
rad1
(0.4 in)

d2

TO ANSYS
(4 in)

ANSYS 10.0-
thick r_fillet
(0.5 in) (0.4 in)

10.0
10.0-- Part
rad1
(0.4 in)

Part 1
width

1
(2 in)
10. APDL Basics
2-D Bracket using Parameters Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
1. Enter ANSYS in the working directory specified by your instructor using “bracket2d”
as the jobname.
2. Define the parameters:
– Utility Menu > Parameters > Scalar Parameters ...
• d1 = 6
• d2 = 4
• d3 = 2
• e_size = 0.25
• e_type=82

TO ANSYS
• ex1 = 30e6

ANSYS 10.0-
• nu = 0.27
• r_fillet = 0.4
• rad1 = 0.4
• thick = 0.5

10.0
10.0-- Part
• [Close]

Part 1
1
10. APDL Basics
2-D Bracket using Parameters Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
3. Enter the preprocessor and create two rectangular areas:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Create > Areas > Rectangle > By Centr & Cornr +
• WP X = d1/2
• WP Y = 0
• Width = d1
• Height = d3
• [Apply]
• WP X = d1-d3/2
• WP Y = -d2/2+d3/2

TO ANSYS
• Width = d3
• Height = d2

ANSYS 10.0-
• [OK]
– Or issue:
/PREP7
BLC5, d1/2, 0, d1, d3

10.0
10.0-- Part
BLC5, d1-d3/2, -d2/2+d3/2, d3, d2

Part 1
1
10. APDL Basics
2-D Bracket using Parameters Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
4. Create two circular areas:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Create > Areas > Circle > Solid Circle +
• WP X = 0
• WP Y = 0
• Radius = d3/2
• [Apply]
• WP X = d1-d3/2
• WP Y = -d2+d3/2
• Radius = d3/2

TO ANSYS
• [OK]
– Or issue:

ANSYS 10.0-
CYL4, , ,d3/2
CYL4, d1-d3/2, -d2+d3/2, d3/2

10.0
10.0-- Part
5. Add all of the areas together to form a single area:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Operate > Booleans > Add > Areas +
• [Pick All]

Part 1
– Or issue:
AADD,ALL

1
10. APDL Basics
2-D Bracket using Parameters Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
6. Turn line numbering on and plot lines:
– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Numbering ...
• Set Line numbers on, then [OK]
– Utility Menu > Plot > Lines
– Or issue:
/PNUM,LINE,1
LPLOT

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
7. Create a line fillet at the intersection of lines 18 and 24:

10.0
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Create > Lines > Line Fillet +

10.0-- Part
• Pick lines 18 and 24, then [OK]
• RAD = r_fillet

Part 1
• [OK]
– Or issue:
LFILLT, 18, 24, r_fillet

1
10. APDL Basics
2-D Bracket using Parameters Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
8. Plot lines and then create an area bounded by lines 1, 3, and 4:
– Utility Menu > Plot > Lines
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Create > Areas > Arbitrary > By Lines +
• Pick lines 1, 3, and 4, then [OK]
– Or issue:
LPLOT
AL, 1, 3, 4

TO ANSYS
9. Add all of the areas together to form a single area:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Operate > Booleans > Add > Areas +

ANSYS 10.0-
• [Pick All]
– Or issue:
AADD,ALL

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
10. APDL Basics
2-D Bracket using Parameters Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
10. Create the two circular areas for the bracket holes:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Create > Areas > Circle > Solid Circle +
• WP X = 0
• WP Y = 0
• Radius = rad1
• [Apply]
• WP X = d1-d3/2
• WP Y = -d2+d3/2
• Radius = rad1

TO ANSYS
• [OK]
– Or issue:

ANSYS 10.0-
CYL4, , ,rad1
CYL4, d1-d3/2, -d2+d3/2, rad1

11. Subtract the two circular areas from the bracket area:

10.0
10.0-- Part
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Modeling > Operate > Booleans > Subtract > Areas +
• Pick the bracket (base) area, then [APPLY]
• Pick the two circular areas, then [OK]

Part 1
– Or issue:
ASBA, 2, ALL

1
10. APDL Basics
2-D Bracket using Parameters Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
12. Define element type 1 as PLANE82 and set keyopt(3)=3:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Element Type > Add/Edit/Delete ...
• [Add ...]
• Select “Structural Solid” and “Quad 4node 42”, then [OK]
• [Options …]
• K3 = Plane strs w/thk
• [OK]
• [Close]
– Or issue:

TO ANSYS
ET, 1, e_type (or ET, 1, PLANE82)
KEYOPT, 1, 3, 3

ANSYS 10.0-
13. Define the bracket thickness:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Real Constants > Add/Edit/Delete …
• [Add ...]

10.0
10.0-- Part
• [OK]
• THK = thick
• [OK]

Part 1
• [Close]
– Or issue:
R, 1, thick

1
10. APDL Basics
2-D Bracket using Parameters Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
14. Define material properties:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Material Props > Material Models > Structural > Linear > Elastic > Isotropic ...
• [OK]
• EX = ex1
• NUXY = nu
• [OK]
– Or issue:
MP, EX, 1, ex1
MP, NUXY, 1, nu

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
10. APDL Basics
2-D Bracket using Parameters Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
15. Set element size and free mesh the model with quad elements:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor > Meshing > MeshTool …
• Activate smart sizing and set its level to 4
• Pick [Set] under Size Controls: Global
• SIZE = e_size
• [OK]
• Select “Quad” and “Free” under Shape:
• [Mesh]
• [Pick All]

TO ANSYS
– Or issue:
SMRTSIZE,4

ANSYS 10.0-
ESIZE,e_size
MSHAPE,0,2D
MSHKEY,0
AMESH,ALL

10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
10. APDL Basics
2-D Bracket using Parameters Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
16. Save the meshed model and exit ANSYS:
– Utility Menu > File > Save as …
• Enter “bracket2d-mesh.db” as the database name, then [OK]
– Pick the “QUIT” button in the Toolbar
• Select “Quit - No Save!”
• [OK]
– Or issue:
SAVE,bracket2d-mesh,db
FINISH

TO ANSYS
/EXIT,NOSAVE

ANSYS 10.0-
10.0
10.0-- Part
Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION ANSYS 10.0-
TO ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0-- Part 1
Workshop Supplement

3-D Bracket
Loading and Solution
Workshop 11A
11A. Loading and Solution
3-D Bracket Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Description
• Apply loads to the 3-D bracket model below and solve using the
PCG iterative solver. The model has already been meshed with
SOLID95 20-noded bricks, and Young’s Modulus has been set to
30e6 psi.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0 -- Part 1
Workshop Supplement
11A. Loading and Solution
3-D Bracket
Loads
11A. Loading and Solution
3-D Bracket Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
1. Enter ANSYS in the working directory specified by your instructor using “bracket-3d”
as the jobname.
2. Resume the “bracket-3d.db1” database file:
– Utility Menu > File > Resume from …
• Select the “bracket-3d.db1” database file, then [OK]
– Or issue:
RESUME,bracket-3d,db1

3. Enter the solution processor and restrain translations normal to hole surfaces:

TO ANSYS
– Main Menu > Solution > Define Loads > Apply > Structural > Displacement > Symmetry B.C. > On Areas +
• Pick the areas on the hole surfaces (area numbers 3, 4, 5, and 6), then [OK]

ANSYS 10.0
– Or issue:
/SOLU
DA,3,SYMM
DA,4,SYMM

10.0 -- Part
DA,5,SYMM
DA,6,SYMM

Part 1
1
11A. Loading and Solution
3-D Bracket Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
4. To prevent rigid body motion along the Z axis, constrain UZ translation on node 4282:
– Main Menu > Solution > Define Loads > Apply > Structural > Displacement > On Nodes +
• Enter node number “4282” in the ANSYS Input window followed by [Enter]
• [OK]
• Set Lab2 = “UZ”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
D,4282,UZ

5. Apply 1000 psi pressure load to the top surface area of the 3-D bracket:

TO ANSYS
– Main Menu > Solution >Define Loads > Apply > Structural > Pressure > On Areas +
• Pick the top surface area (area number 11) , then [OK]

ANSYS 10.0
• Set VALUE = 1000, then [OK]
– Or issue:
SFA,11,1,PRES,1000

6. Select the PCG iterative solver:

10.0 -- Part
– Main Menu > Solution > Analysis Type > Sol’n Control ...
• Pick the “Sol’n Options” tab
• Select the “Pre-Condition CG” solver, then [OK]

Part 1
– Or issue:
EQSLV,PCG,1.0E-8

1
11A. Loading and Solution
3-D Bracket Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
7. Save the database and obtain the solution:
– Pick the “SAVE_DB” button in the Toolbar (or select: Utility Menu > File > Save as Jobname.db)
– Main Menu > Solution > Solve > Current LS
• [OK]
– Or issue:
SAVE
SOLVE

8. After the solution is completed, enter the general postprocessor and plot the von
Mises stress (SEQV):

TO ANSYS
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Nodal Solu …

ANSYS 10.0
• Select “Stress” and “von Mises SEQV”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
/POST1
PLNSOL,S,EQV

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0 -- Part 1
Workshop Supplement
11A. Loading and Solution
3-D Bracket
11A. Loading and Solution
3-D Bracket Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
9. Change the viewing angle and replot:
– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > View Settings > Viewing Direction ...
• XV = -0.5
• YV = -0.25
• ZV = 1
• [OK]
– Or issue:
/VIEW,1,-0.5, -0.25, 1

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
10. Save and exit ANSYS:

Part 1
– Pick the “SAVE_DB” button in the Toolbar
– Pick the “QUIT” button in the Toolbar

1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION ANSYS 10.0-
TO ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0-- Part 1
Workshop Supplement

Connecting Rod
Loading and Solution
Workshop 11B
11B. Loading and Solution
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Description
• Apply loads to the connecting rod (half-symmetry) model below
and solve using the PCG iterative solver. The model has already
been meshed with SOLID95 20-noded bricks, and Young’s
Modulus has been set to 30e6 psi.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0 -- Part 1
Workshop Supplement
11B. Loading and Solution
Connecting Rod
Loads
11B. Loading and Solution
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
1. Enter ANSYS in the working directory specified by your instructor using “conn-rod”
as the jobname.
2. Resume the “conn-rod.db1” database file:
– Utility Menu > File > Resume from …
• Select the “conn-rod.db1” database file, then [OK]
– Or issue:
RESUME,conn-rod,db1

3. Enter the solution processor and restrain translations normal to the larger hole

TO ANSYS
surfaces:
– Main Menu > Solution >Define Loads > Apply > Structural > Displacement > Symmetry B.C. > On Areas +

ANSYS 10.0
• Pick the areas on the hole surfaces (area numbers 8 and 9), then [OK]
– Or issue:
/SOLU
DA,8,SYMM

10.0 -- Part
DA,9,SYMM

Part 1
1
11B. Loading and Solution
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
4. Apply symmetry boundary constraints on all area surfaces at Y=0:
– Main Menu > Solution >Define Loads > Apply > Structural > Displacement > Symmetry B.C.- On Areas +
• Pick the areas on the plane Y=0 (area numbers 7, 10 and 13), then [OK]
– Or issue:
/SOLU
DA,7,SYMM
DA,10,SYMM
DA,13,SYMM

5. To prevent rigid body motion along the Z axis, constrain UZ translation on node 702:

TO ANSYS
– Main Menu > Solution > Loads > Apply > Structural > Displacement > On Nodes +

ANSYS 10.0
• Enter node number “702” in the ANSYS Input window followed by [Enter]
• [OK]
• Set Lab2 = “UZ”, then [OK]
– Or issue:

10.0 -- Part
D,702,UZ

Part 1
1
11B. Loading and Solution
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
6. Apply 1000 psi pressure load to area number 11 located on the smaller hole:
– Main Menu > Solution > Define Loads > Apply > Structural > Pressure > On Areas +
• Pick area number 11, then [OK]
• Set VALUE = 1000, then [OK]
– Or issue:
SFA,11,1,PRES,1000

7. Select the PCG iterative solver:


– Main Menu > Solution > Analysis Type > Sol’n Control ...

TO ANSYS
• Pick the “Sol’n Options” tab
• Select the “Pre-Condition CG” solver, then [OK]

ANSYS 10.0
– Or issue:
EQSLV,PCG,1.0E-8

8. Save the database and obtain the solution:


– Pick the “SAVE_DB” button in the Toolbar (or select: Utility Menu > File > Save as Jobname.db)

10.0 -- Part
– Main Menu > Solution > Solve > Current LS
• [OK]
– Or issue:

Part 1
SAVE
SOLVE

1
11B. Loading and Solution
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
9. After the solution is completed, enter the general postprocessor and plot the von
Mises stress (SEQV):
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Nodal Solu …
• Select “Stress” and “von Mises SEQV”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
/POST1
PLNSOL,S,EQV

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
10. Save and exit ANSYS:

Part 1
– Pick the “SAVE_DB” button in the Toolbar
– Pick the “QUIT” button in the Toolbar

1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION ANSYS 10.0-
TO ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0-- Part 1
Workshop Supplement

Loading and Solution

Wheel
Workshop 11C
11C. Loading and Solution
Wheel Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Description
• Apply loads to the wheel model shown
here and solve using the PCG iterative
solver.
• The model has already been meshed with
SOLID45 bricks, SOLID95 pyramids, and
SOLID92 tets.

TO ANSYS
• Young’s Modulus has been set to 30e6

ANSYS 10.0
psi and density has been set to 0.00073
lbf-s^2/in^4.

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0 -- Part 1
Workshop Supplement
11C. Loading and Solution
Wheel
Loads
11C. Loading and Solution
Wheel Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Loads (continued)

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
11C. Loading and Solution
Wheel Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
1. Enter ANSYS in the working directory specified by your instructor using “wheelb-

INTRODUCTION TO
omega” as the jobname.
2. Resume the “wheelb-omega.db1” database file:
– Utility Menu > File > Resume from …
• Select the “wheelb-omega.db1” database file, then [OK]
– Or issue:
RESUME,wheelb-omega,db1

3. Select the areas from the area component name “areas_1”:

TO ANSYS
– Utility Menu > Select > Comp/Assembly > Select Comp/Assembly ...
• [OK]

ANSYS 10.0
– Utility Menu > Plot > Areas
– Or issue:
CMSEL,S,AREAS_1
APLOT

10.0 -- Part
4. Apply symmetry boundary conditions on the selected set of areas:
– Main Menu > Solution > Define Loads > Apply > Structural > Displacement > Symmetry B.C.- On Areas +
• [Pick All]

Part 1
– Or issue:
/SOLU
DA,ALL,SYMM

1
11C. Loading and Solution
Wheel Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
5. Select everything and plot areas:
– Utility Menu > Select > Everything
– Utility Menu > Plot > Areas
– Or issue:
ALLSEL,ALL,ALL
APLOT

6. To prevent rigid body motion, constrain UY translation on node 33:


– Main Menu > Solution > Define Loads > Apply > Structural > Displacement > On Nodes +

TO ANSYS
• Enter node number “33” in the ANSYS Input window followed by [Enter]
• [OK]

ANSYS 10.0
• Set Lab2 = “UY”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
D,33,UY

7. Apply rotational velocity of 525 rad/sec about global Y axis:

10.0 -- Part
– Main Menu > Solution > Define Loads > Apply > Structural > Inertia > Angular Velocity > Global ...
• Set OMEGY = 525
• [OK]

Part 1
– Or issue:
OMEGA,0,525

1
11C. Loading and Solution
Wheel Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
8. Select the PCG iterative solver:
– Main Menu > Solution > Analysis Type > Sol’n Control ...
• Pick the “Sol’n Options” tab
• Select the “Pre-Condition CG” solver, then [OK]
– Or issue:
EQSLV,PCG,1.0E-8

9. Save the database and obtain the solution:


– Pick the “SAVE_DB” button in the Toolbar (or select: Utility Menu > File > Save as Jobname.db)

TO ANSYS
– Main Menu > Solution > Solve > Current LS
• [OK]

ANSYS 10.0
– Or issue:
SAVE
SOLVE

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
11C. Loading and Solution
Wheel Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
10. After the solution is completed, enter the general postprocessor and plot the von
Mises stress (SEQV):
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Nodal Solu …
• Select “Stress” and “von Mises SEQV”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
/POST1
PLNSOL,S,EQV

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
11C. Loading and Solution
Wheel Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
11. Expand the results about the Z-axis of local coordinate system 11 (cylindrical):
– Utility Menu > WorkPlane > Change Active CS to > Specified Coord Sys …
• KCN = 11
• [OK]
– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Style > Symmetry Expansion > User Specified Expansion ...
• NREPEAT = 16
• TYPE = “Local Polar”
• PATTERN = “Alternate Symm”
• DY = 22.5

TO ANSYS
• [OK]
– Or issue:

ANSYS 10.0
/EXPAND,16,LPOLAR,HALF,,22.5
/REPLOT

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
11C. Loading and Solution
Wheel Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
12. Turn expansion off:
– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Style > Symmetry Expansion > No Expansion
– Utility Menu > Plot > Replot
– Or issue:
/EXPAND
/REPLOT

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
13. Save and exit ANSYS:
– Pick the “SAVE_DB” button in the Toolbar
– Pick the “QUIT” button in the Toolbar

1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0 -- Part 1
Workshop Supplement

Connecting Rod
Postprocessing
Workshop 12A
12A. Postprocessing
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Description
• Postprocess the connecting rod from workshop 11 using query
picking and path operations.
• Check the error level, then refine the mesh and re-solve. Compare
the two sets of results.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
12A. Postprocessing
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
1. Enter ANSYS in the working directory specified by your instructor using “conn-rod”
as the jobname.
2. Resume the “conn-rod.db” database file from workshop 11:
– Utility Menu > File > Resume from …
• Select the “conn-rod.db” database file, then [OK]
– Or issue:
RESUME,conn-rod,db

3. Enter the general postprocessor and plot the von Mises stress:

TO ANSYS
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Nodal Solu ...
• Select “Stress” and “von Mises SEQV”, then [OK]

ANSYS 10.0
– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Pan, Zoom, Rotate …
• [Fit]
– Or issue:
/POST1

10.0 -- Part
PLNSOL,S,EQV
/AUTO,1
/REPLOT

Part 1
1
12A. Postprocessing
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
4. Query the von Mises stress results:
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Query Results > Subgrid Solu ...
• Select “Stress” and “von Mises SEQV”, then [OK]
• Pick various grid locations on the model
• [Reset]
• [Min]
• [Max]
• [OK]

5. Map von Mises stress onto a path:

TO ANSYS
5a. Define two paths:

ANSYS 10.0
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Path Operations > Define Path > By Nodes +
• Enter node numbers “824,1029” in the ANSYS Input window followed by [Enter]
• [OK]
• Enter “path1” for Name, then [OK]

10.0 -- Part
• Review the “PDEF” path window, then close it
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Path Operations > Define Path > By Nodes +
• Enter node numbers “1029,521” in the ANSYS Input window followed by [Enter]

Part 1
• [OK]
• Enter “path2” for Name, then [OK]
• Review the “PDEF” path window, then close it

1
12A. Postprocessing
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
5b. Map von Mises, SX, SY, and SZ stresses onto path2:
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Path Operations > Map onto Path ...
• Set lab = “p2-seqv”
• Select “Stress” and “von Mises SEQV”, then [Apply]
• Set lab = “p2-sx”
• Select “Stress” and “X-direction SX”, then [Apply]
• Set lab = “p2-sy”
• Select “Stress” and “Y-direction SY”, then [Apply]
• Set lab = “p2-sz”

TO ANSYS
• Select “Stress” and “Z-direction SZ”, then [Apply]
– Or issue:

ANSYS 10.0
PDEF,P2-SEQV,S,EQV,AVG
PDEF,P2-SX,S,X,AVG
PDEF,P2-SY,S,Y,AVG
PDEF,P2-SZ,S,Z,AVG

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
12A. Postprocessing
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
5c. Plot path2 items on graph:
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Path Operations > -Plot Path Item > On Graph …
• Select “P2-SEQV”, then [Apply]
• Select “P2-SX” and unselect “P2-SEQV”, then [Apply]
• Select “P2-SY” and unselect “P2-SX”, then [Apply]
• Select “P2-SZ” and unselect “P2-SY”, then [Apply]
• Select all four path2 items, then [OK]
– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Style > Graphs > Modify Axes …
• X-axis label = “Path2 Distance”

TO ANSYS
• Y-axis label = “Stress, psi”
• Select “Specified range” for Y-Axis range

ANSYS 10.0
• Set YMIN = -1000 and YMAX = 1900, then [OK]
– Utility Menu > Plot > Replot
– Or issue:
PLPATH,P2-SEQV

10.0 -- Part
PLPATH,P2-SX
PLPATH,P2-SY
PLPATH,P2-SZ

Part 1
PLPATH,P2-SEQV,P2-SX,P2-SY,P2-SZ
/YRANGE,-1000,1900 $ /AXLAB,X,Path2 Distance $ /AXLAB,Y,Stress, psi

1
/REPLOT
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0 -- Part 1
Workshop Supplement
Connecting Rod
12A. Postprocessing
12A. Postprocessing
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
5d. Set “path1” to be the current path and set graph axes to default values:
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Path Operations > Recall Path ...
• Select “PATH1”, then [OK]
• Close the “PDEF” window
– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Style > Graphs > Modify Axes …
• X-axis label = “ ”
• Y-axis label = “ ”
• Select “Auto calculated” for Y-Axis range, then [OK]
– Or issue:

TO ANSYS
PATH,PATH1
PDEF,STAT

ANSYS 10.0
/YRANGE,DEFAULT $ /AXLAB,X $ /AXLAB,Y

5e. Repeat steps 5b. and 5c. for path1 and replace “p2” with “p1” for the path labels:
modify the axes as follows:

10.0 -- Part
– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Style > Graphs > Modify Axes …
• X-axis label = “Path1 Distance”
• Y-axis label = “Stress, psi”

Part 1
• Select “Specified range” for Y-Axis range
• Set YMIN = -1100 and YMAX = 1800, then [OK]
– Utility Menu > Plot > Replot

1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0 -- Part 1
Workshop Supplement
Connecting Rod
12A. Postprocessing
12A. Postprocessing
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
6. Plot the paths on the model:
– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Style > Colors > Entity Colors …
• Change “Outline color” to black, then [OK]
– Utility Menu > Plot > Elements
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Path Operations > Plot Paths
– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Style > Colors > Entity Colors …
• Change “Outline color” to white, then [OK]
– Or issue:
/COLOR,OUTL,BLAC

TO ANSYS
EPLOT
/PBC,PATH,1

ANSYS 10.0
/REPLOT
/PBC,PATH,0
/COLOR,OUTL,WHIT

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
12A. Postprocessing
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
7. Plot error estimations:
7a. Switch the graphics display from PowerGraphics to Full Model:
– Pick the “POWRGRPH” button in the Toolbar (or Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Style > Hidden-Line Options )
• Select “Off”, then [OK]
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Options for Outp.. >
• Set ERNORM = “On”
• [OK]
– Or issue:

TO ANSYS
/GRAPHICS,FULL
ERNORM,ON

ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
12A. Postprocessing
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
7b. Plot the Structural Elemental Energy Error (SERR):
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Element Solu ...
• Select “Error estimation” and “Structural Error Energy SERR”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
PLESOL,SERR

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
12A. Postprocessing
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
7c. Plot the Stress Deviation Error (SDSG):
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Element Solu ...
• Select “Error estimation” and “Stress Variation SDSG”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
PLESOL,SDSG

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
12A. Postprocessing
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
7d. Plot the Structural Percentage Error (SEPC):
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Nodal Solu ...
• Select “DOF solution” and “Translation USUM”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
PLNSOL,U,SUM

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
12A. Postprocessing
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
7e. Plot the maximum and minimum stress bounds for SEQV:
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Nodal Solu ...
• Select “Stress” and “von Mises SEQV”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
PLNSOL,S,EQV

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
12A. Postprocessing
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
8. Refine the mesh using an ESIZE=0.1 and resolve:
– Main Menu > Preprocessor >Meshing > MeshTool …
• Pick [Set] under Size Controls: Global
• SIZE = 0.1, then [OK]
• Select “Hex” and “Sweep”, then [Sweep]
• [Pick All]
• [OK]
– Main Menu > Solution > Define Loads > Apply > Structural > Displacement > On Nodes +
• Enter node number 2932 in the ANSYS Input window followed by Enter, then [OK]

TO ANSYS
• Select “UZ”
• [OK]

ANSYS 10.0
– Main Menu > Solution > Solve > Current LS
• [OK]
– Or issue:
/PREP7

10.0 -- Part
ESIZE,0.1
VCLEAR,1
VSWEEP,ALL

Part 1
/SOLU
D,2932,UZ

1
SOLVE
12A. Postprocessing
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
9. Plot error estimations and compare the results to the ones from step 6:
9a. Enter the general postprocessor and plot the Structural Elemental Energy Error
(SERR):
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Element Solu ...
• Select “Error estimation” and “Structural Error Energy SERR”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
/POST1
PLESOL,SERR

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
12A. Postprocessing
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
9b. Plot the Stress Deviation Error (SDSG):
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Element Solu ...
• Select “Error estimation” and “Stress variation SDSG”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
PLESOL,SDSG

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
12A. Postprocessing
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
9c. Plot the Structural Percentage Error (SEPC):
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Nodal Solu ...
• Select “DOF solution” and “Translation USUM”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
PLNSOL,U,SUM

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
12A. Postprocessing
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
9d. Plot the maximum and minimum stress bounds for SEQV:
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Nodal Solu ...
• Select “Stress” and “von Mises SEQV”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
PLNSOL,S,EQV

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
12A. Postprocessing
Connecting Rod Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
10. Save the results with ESIZE=0.1 and exit ANSYS:
– Utility Menu > File > Save as …
• Enter “conn-rod2.db” as the database name, then [OK]
– Pick the “QUIT” button in the Toolbar
• Select “Quit - No Save!”
• [OK]
– Or issue:
SAVE,conn-rod2,db
FINISH

TO ANSYS
/EXIT,NOSAVE

ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0 -- Part 1
Workshop Supplement

Spherical Shell
Postprocessing
Workshop 12B
12B. Postprocessing
Spherical Shell Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Description
• Review the results of a spherical shell analysis using both global
Cartesian and spherical coordinate systems. Check results at the
top and bottom as well as the middle of the shell.
• The model consists of 1/8th of a sphere, and input for the analysis
is provided.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0 -- Part 1
Workshop Supplement
Spherical Shell
12B. Postprocessing

Loads
12B. Postprocessing
Spherical Shell Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
1. Enter ANSYS in the working directory specified by your instructor using “shell” as
the jobname.
2. Read input from the “shell.inp” file:
– Utility Menu > File > Read Input from …
• Select the “shell.inp” file, then [OK]
– Or issue:
/INPUT,shell,inp

3. Enter the general postprocessor and set the number of facets per element edge to

TO ANSYS
two for PowerGraphics displays:
– Main Menu > General Postproc

ANSYS 10.0
– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Style > Size and Shape …
• Set /EFACET = “2 facets/edge”, then OK
– Or issue:
/POST1

10.0 -- Part
/EFACET,2

Part 1
1
12B. Postprocessing
Spherical Shell Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
4a. Plot the nodal solution for the X component stress in rsys=0:
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Nodal Solu ...
• Select “Stress” and “X-direction SX”
• Select “Corner _midside”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
PLNSOL,S,X

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
12B. Postprocessing
Spherical Shell Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
4b. Plot the nodal solution for the Y component stress in rsys=0:
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Nodal Solu ...
• Select “Stress” and “Y-direction SY”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
PLNSOL,S,Y

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
12B. Postprocessing
Spherical Shell Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
4c. Plot the nodal solution for the Z component stress in rsys=0:
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Nodal Solu ...
• Select “Stress” and “Z-direction SZ”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
PLNSOL,S,Z

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
12B. Postprocessing
Spherical Shell Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
4d. Plot the nodal solution for the von Mises stress (SEQV) in rsys=0:
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Nodal Solu ...
• Select “Stress” and “von Mises SEQV”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
PLNSOL,S,EQV

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
12B. Postprocessing
Spherical Shell Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
4f. Plot the nodal solution for the von Mises stress (SEQV) at middle of shell in rsys=0:
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Options for Output ...
• Set SHELL = “Middle layer”; then OK
– Utility Menu > Plot > Replot
– Or issue:
SHELL,MID
/REPLOT

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
12B. Postprocessing
Spherical Shell Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
5. Set the results coordinate system to be global spherical and set the shell layer
location to be top and bottom. In addition, and turn off element outlines:
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Options for Outp …
• Set RSYS = “Global spherical”
• Set SHELL = “Top layer” (or “Bottom layer”); then OK
– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Style > Size and Shape …
• Set /ESHAPE = On, then [OK]
– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Style > Edge Options ...
• Set /GLINE = “None”, then [OK]

TO ANSYS
– Or issue:
RSYS,2

ANSYS 10.0
SHELL,TOP (or SHELL,BOT)
/ESHAPE,1
/GLINE,1,-1

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
12B. Postprocessing
Spherical Shell Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
6a. Plot the nodal solution for the X component stress in rsys=2 (radial stress):
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Nodal Solu ...
• Select “Stress” and “X-direction SX”
– Or issue:
PLNSOL,S,X

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
12B. Postprocessing
Spherical Shell Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
6b. Plot the nodal solution for the Y component stress in rsys=2 (stress in theta dir.):
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Nodal Solu ...
• Select “Stress” and “Y-direction SY”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
PLNSOL,S,Y

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
12B. Postprocessing
Spherical Shell Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
6c. Plot the nodal solution for the Z component stress in rsys=2 (stress in phi dir.):
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Nodal Solu ...
• Select “Stress” and “Z-direction SZ”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
PLNSOL,S,Z

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
12B. Postprocessing
Spherical Shell Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
6d. Plot the nodal solution for the von Mises stress (SEQV) in rsys=2:
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Nodal Solu ...
• Select “Stress” and “von Mises SEQV”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
PLNSOL,S,EQV

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
12B. Postprocessing
Spherical Shell Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
7. Save results and exit ANSYS:
– Pick the “QUIT” button in the Toolbar
• Select “Save Everything”
• [OK]
– Or issue:
FINISH
/EXIT,ALL

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Workshop 12C

Postprocessing

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
Axisymmetric Fin
with Multiple Load Steps

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
12C. Postprocessing
Axisymmetric Fin w/ Multiple L.S. Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Description
• Solve the axisymmetric fin problem from Workshops 3 and 4
using two load steps:
1) temperature loads from thermal analysis
2) internal pressure

TO ANSYS
Add the two load step results in the postprocessor using load
case combinations and then compare the results to the results

ANSYS 10.0
obtained in Workshop 4.

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
12C. Postprocessing
Axisymmetric Fin w/ Multiple L.S. Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Loads and Material Properties

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
12C. Postprocessing
Axisymmetric Fin w/ Multiple L.S. Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
1. Enter ANSYS in the working directory specified by your instructor using “multi-ls” as
the jobname.
2. Read input from the “multi-ls.inp” file (multi-ls.inp runs the thermal analysis from
workshop 3 and creates the multi-ls.rth thermal results file):
– Utility Menu > File > Read Input from …
• Select the “multi-ls.inp” file, then [OK]
– Or issue:
/INPUT,multi-ls,inp

TO ANSYS
3. Close the yellow warning message window then enter the solution processor and
apply body force temperatures on the nodes for load step 1. Verify the temperature

ANSYS 10.0
load by plotting body force temperatures:
• [Close]
– Main Menu > Solution > Define Loads > Apply > Structural > Temperature > From Therm Analy ...
• Scroll down and select “multi-ls.rth”, then [OK]

10.0 -- Part
– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Symbols …
• Set /PBF = “Structural temps”, then [OK]
– Or issue:

Part 1
/SOLU
LDREAD,TEMP,,,,,multi-ls,rth
/PBF,TEMP,,1 $ EPLOT

1
12C. Postprocessing
Axisymmetric Fin w/ Multiple L.S. Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
4. Solve the solution for load step 1:
– Main Menu > Solution > Solve > Current LS
• Review the “/STATUS Command” window and then close it
• [OK]
• [Close] - to close the yellow message window after the solution is completed
– Or issue:
SOLVE

5. Delete the thermal body force loads from load step 1 (NOTE, DO NOT EXIT THE
SOLUTION PROCESSOR):

TO ANSYS
– Main Menu > Solution > Define Loads > Delete > Structural > Temperature > On Nodes +

ANSYS 10.0
• [Pick All]
– Utility Menu > List > Loads > Body Loads > On All Nodes
• Verify that the “BFLIS” window does not list any body force loads and then close it
– Or issue:

10.0 -- Part
BFDELE,ALL,TEMP
BFLIS,ALL

Part 1
1
12C. Postprocessing
Axisymmetric Fin w/ Multiple L.S. Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
6. Apply load step 2, a constant pressure of 1000 psi on the inside surface of the pipe:

INTRODUCTION TO
– Main Menu > Solution > Define Loads > Apply > Structural > Pressure > On Lines +
– Utility Menu > Plot > Areas
• Pick the line representing the inside of the pipe (line number 4), then [OK]
• Set VALUE = 1000
• [OK]
– Or issue:
SFL,4,PRES,1000

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
7. Solve the solution for load step 2:

10.0 -- Part
– Main Menu > Solution > Solve > Current LS
• Review the “/STATUS Command” window, Load Step Number should be 2, then close it
• [OK]

Part 1
• [Close] - to close the yellow message window after the solution is completed
– Or issue:
SOLVE

1
12C. Postprocessing
Axisymmetric Fin w/ Multiple L.S. Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
8. Enter the general postprocessor and plot von Mises stress (SEQV) from load step 2:
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot> Nodal Solu ...
• Select “Stress” and “von Mises SEQV”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
/POST1
PLNSOL,S,EQV

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
12C. Postprocessing
Axisymmetric Fin w/ Multiple L.S. Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
9. Read load step 1 results into the memory database:
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Results Summary
• Select Set 1, then [Read]
• [Close] - to close the “Results File: multi-ls.rst” dialog box
– Or issue:
SET,1,1

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
12C. Postprocessing
Axisymmetric Fin w/ Multiple L.S. Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
10. Plot the von Mises stress (SEQV) from load step 1:
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Nodal Solu ...
• Select “Stress” and “von Mises SEQV”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
PLNSOL,S,EQV

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
12C. Postprocessing
Axisymmetric Fin w/ Multiple L.S. Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
11. Add together load step 1 and load step 2 results using load case combinations:
11a. Create a Load Case using a reference number of 2. Load Case 2 will point to Load
Step 2 results:
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Load Case > Create Load Case ...
• Select “Results file”, then [OK]
• Set LCNO = 2
• Set LSTEP = 2
• [OK]
– Or issue:

TO ANSYS
LCDEF,2,2

ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
12C. Postprocessing
Axisymmetric Fin w/ Multiple L.S. Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
11b. Add Load Case 2 (i.e. Load Step 2 results) to what is currently stored in the memory
database (i.e. Load Step 1 results):
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Load Case > Add ...
• Set LCASE1 = 2, then [OK]
• [OK]
– Or issue:
LCOPER,ADD,2

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
12C. Postprocessing
Axisymmetric Fin w/ Multiple L.S. Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
12. Plot the von Mises stress (SEQV) from the Load Case combination results (I.e. load
step 1 + load step 2):
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Nodal Solu ...
• Select “Stress” and “von Mises SEQV”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
PLNSOL,S,EQV

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
12C. Postprocessing
Axisymmetric Fin w/ Multiple L.S. Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
13. Expand the axisymmetric von Mises stress 90 degrees about Y axis and reflect about
the x-z plane. Then turn off the element outline:
– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Style > Symmetry Expansion > 2D Axi-Symmetric ...
• Select “1/4 expansion” and set reflection to “yes”, then [OK]
– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Pan, Zoom, Rotate …
• [ISO]
– Utility Menu > PlotCtrls > Style > Edge Options
• Set /GLINE = “None”
• Set /REPLOT = ‘Replot” then OK

TO ANSYS
– Or issue:
/EXPAND, 9,AXIS,,,10,,2,RECT,HALF,,0.00001

ANSYS 10.0
/VIEW,1,1,1,1
/AUTO,1
/GLINE,1,-1
/REPLOT

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
12C. Postprocessing
Axisymmetric Fin w/ Multiple L.S. Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
12C. Postprocessing
Axisymmetric Fin w/ Multiple L.S. Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
14a. Plot displacement:s from the Load Case combination results (I.e. load step 1 + load
step 2):
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Nodal Solu ...
• Select “DOF solution” and “Translation USUM”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
PLNSOL,U,SUM

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
12C. Postprocessing
Axisymmetric Fin w/ Multiple L.S. Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
14b. Plot radial stress from the Load Case combination results (I.e. load step 1 + load
step 2):
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Nodal Solu ...
• Select “Stress” and “X-direction SX”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
PLNSOL,S,X

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
12C. Postprocessing
Axisymmetric Fin w/ Multiple L.S. Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
14c. Plot longitudinal stress from the Load Case combination results (I.e. load step 1 +
load step 2):
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Nodal Solu ...
• Select “Stress” and “Y-direction SY”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
PLNSOL,S,Y

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
12C. Postprocessing
Axisymmetric Fin w/ Multiple L.S. Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
14d. Plot tangential stress from the Load Case combination results (I.e. load step 1 + load
step 2):
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Nodal Solu ...
• Select “Stress” and “Z-direction SZ”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
PLNSOL,S,Z

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
12C. Postprocessing
Axisymmetric Fin w/ Multiple L.S. Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
15. Save the Load Case combination results as Load Step 3 in the “multi-ls.rst” results
file:
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Write Results …
• Set LSTEP = 3
• Set TIME = 3
• [OK]
– Or issue:
RAPPND,3,3

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
16. Exit ANSYS:
– Pick the “QUIT” button from the Toolbar (or select: Utility Menu > File > Exit...)

10.0 -- Part
• Select “Save Everything”
• [OK]
– Or issue:

Part 1
FINISH
/EXIT,ALL

1
Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Workshop 13A

Short Topics

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
Batch Mode: Plate with
Hole at Center

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
13A. Short Topics
Batch Mode: Plate with Hole at Center Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Description
• Solve the plate-with-a-hole model shown below using batch mode.
The batch input file has been provided and contains commands to
build the solid model, mesh it, apply loads, and solve.
• After the solution is completed, use interactive mode to
postprocess the results.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
13A. Short Topics
Batch Mode: Plate with Hole at Center Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Loads and Material Properties

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
13A. Short Topics
Batch Mode: Plate with Hole at Center Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
1. Bring up the ANSYS Batch Launcher, define the launcher options and then run the
solution:
– Start > Programs > ANSYS 10.0 > Ansys Product Launcher > Ansys Batch (for Windows XP)
• Working directory = <working directory specified by your instructor>
• Initial jobname = “plate-13a”
• Input file name = ..\plate-13a.inp
• Output file name = ..\plate-13a.out
• [Run]

2. Start up ANSYS in Interactive mode using “plate-13a” as the jobname and resume the

TO ANSYS
“plate-13a.db” database file created in the batch analysis. Enter the general
postprocessor and plot the SX stress component:

ANSYS 10.0
– Start > Programs > ANSYS 10.0 >Ansys Product Launcher > Ansys (for Windows XP)
– Pick the “RESUM_DB” button in the Toolbar (or select: Utility Menu > File > Resume Jobname.db)
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Nodal Solu …
• Select “Stress” and “X-direction SX”, then [OK]

10.0 -- Part
– Or issue:
/POST1,
PLNSOL,S,X

Part 1
1
13A. Short Topics
Batch Mode: Plate with Hole at Center Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
13A. Short Topics
Batch Mode: Plate with Hole at Center Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
3. Plot the displacement (USUM).
– Main Menu > General Postproc > Plot Results > Contour Plot > Nodal Solu …
• Select “DOF solution” and “Translation USUM”, select “Def + undef edge”, then [OK]
– Or issue:
PLNSOL,U,USUM,2,1

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
4. Save and exit ANSYS:

Part 1
– Pick the “SAVE_DB” button in the Toolbar
– Pick the “QUIT” button in the Toolbar

1
Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Workshop 13B

Short Topics

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
Plate with Hole at Center
(using *ASK)

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
13B. Short Topics
Plate with Hole at Center (using *ASK) Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Description
• Run the plate-with-a-hole problem interactively by reading input
from a file. The input file contains *ASK commands which will
prompt you to enter values for the height, width, diameter, and
pressure load.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
13B. Short Topics
Plate with Hole at Center (using *ASK) Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
1. Enter ANSYS in the working directory specified by your instructor using “plate-13b”
as the jobname.
2. Read input from the file “plate-13b.inp”:
– Utility Menu > File > Read Input from …
• Select the “plate-13b.inp” file, then [OK]
– Or issue:
/INPUT,plate-13b,inp

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
13B. Short Topics
Plate with Hole at Center (using *ASK) Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
3a. Enter the following parameter values when prompted by *ASK:

TO ANSYS
• “5” for height, then [OK]

ANSYS 10.0
• “7” for width, then [OK]
• “1.5” for dia, then [OK]
• use the default pressure value of -1000 by not entering a value and picking [OK]

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
13B. Short Topics
Plate with Hole at Center (using *ASK) Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
3b. The SX component stress plot should be:

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
4. Save and exit ANSYS:

Part 1
– Pick the “SAVE_DB” button in the Toolbar
– Pick the “QUIT” button in the Toolbar

1
Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Workshop 13C

Short Topics

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
Plate w/ Hole at Center
(using *ABBR)

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
13C. Short Topics
Plate w/ Hole at Center (using *ABBR) Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Description
• Create an abbreviation called “PLATE” that will execute a /INPUT
command to read input for the plate-with-a-hole analysis.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
13C. Short Topics
Plate w/ Hole at Center (using *ABBR) Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
1. Enter ANSYS in the working directory specified by your instructor using “plate-13c”
as the jobname.
2. Create an abbreviation called “PLATE” that will execute the command “/INPUT,plate-
13c,inp”:
– Utility Menu > MenuCtrls > Edit Toolbar ...
• Enter “*ABBR,PLATE,/INPUT,plate-13c,inp”, then [Accept]
– Or issue:
*ABBR,PLATE,/INPUT,plate-13c,inp

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
13C. Short Topics
Plate w/ Hole at Center (using *ABBR) Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
3. Run the plate analysis by picking the “PLATE” button in the Toolbar:
• [PLATE]

4. Save the current set of abbreviations:


– Utility Menu > MenuCtrls > Save Toolbar …
• [OK]
– Or issue:
ABBSAV

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
13C. Short Topics
Plate w/ Hole at Center (using *ABBR) Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
5. Clear the ANSYS database:
– Utility Menu > Clear & Start New …
• [OK]
• [Yes]

6. Read in the abbreviations from the file “plate-13c.abbr”:


– Utility Menu > MenuCtrls > Restore Toolbar …
• Select the “plate-13c.abbr” file, then [OK]
– Or issue:

TO ANSYS
ABBRES,NEW,plate-13c,abbr

7. Run the plate analysis again by picking the “PLATE” button in the Toolbar:

ANSYS 10.0
• [PLATE]

8. Save and exit ANSYS:


– Pick the “SAVE_DB” button in the Toolbar

10.0 -- Part
– Pick the “QUIT” button in the Toolbar

Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0 -- Part 1
Workshop Supplement

Pipe Shell
Mechanical Toolbar
Workshop 14
14. Mechanical Toolbar
Pipe Shell Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
Description
• Perform a stress analysis of the pipe shell model using the
Mechanical Toolbar.

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
14. Mechanical Toolbar
Pipe Shell Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
1. Enter ANSYS in the working directory specified by your instructor using “pipe” as the
jobname.
2. Bring up the Mechanical Toolbar:
– Utility Menu > MenuCtrls > Mechanical Toolbar

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
14. Mechanical Toolbar
Pipe Shell Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
3. Under the “Setup” tab, change unit system to “inch-lbm-s-F” and graphic title to
“Pipe Model”:

Pick

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
14. Mechanical Toolbar
Pipe Shell Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
4. Select the “Model” tab and import the “pipe.igs” file:

Pick

TO ANSYS
• Select “pipe.igs”, then [Open]

ANSYS 10.0
• Select “Shell or 2-D Solid”, then [OK]
• Set Name = “pipe - .0625”
• Set Thickness = 0.0625
• [OK]

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0 -- Part 1
Workshop Supplement
14. Mechanical Toolbar
Pipe Shell
14. Mechanical Toolbar
Pipe Shell Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
5. Move the mesh slider to the 4th position (i.e. smrtsize,4):
Slide

TO ANSYS
6. Pick the “Load” tab and change environment name to “force load on stub”:

ANSYS 10.0
Pick

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
14. Mechanical Toolbar
Pipe Shell Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
7. Left-mouse-pick and hold on the “Constrain Area” icon, after icon flyouts appear,
select “Constrain Line”:
Pick

TO ANSYS
• Pick the four lines on the left side of the pipe
• [OK] Pick

ANSYS 10.0
• Select all Motion and Rotation, then [Ok]

Pick

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
14. Mechanical Toolbar
Pipe Shell Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
8. Left-mouse-pick and hold on the “Area Force” icon, after icon flyouts appear, select
“Line Force”:
Pick

TO ANSYS
• Pick the two lines on the right side of the pipe
• [OK]

ANSYS 10.0
• Enter 1000 for force along Z-axis, then [Ok]
Pick

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
14. Mechanical Toolbar
Pipe Shell Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
9a. Pick the “Solve” tab and then the solve button:

Pick

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
• Select “force load on stub”, then [OK]

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
14. Mechanical Toolbar
Pipe Shell Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
9b. When the solution is completed, the following “summary.txt” window will be
displayed along with a von Mises stress plot:

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
14. Mechanical Toolbar
Pipe Shell Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
10. Under the “Results” tab, change the Result Item to “Displaced Shape” and then pick
the “Plot Result” icon:

Pick

TO ANSYS
Pick

ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0 -- Part 1
Workshop Supplement
14. Mechanical Toolbar
Pipe Shell
14. Mechanical Toolbar
Pipe Shell Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
11. Animate the “Displaced Shape” by picking the “Animate Result” icon:

Pick

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
12. Animate the “Equivalent Stress” by picking the “Animate Result” icon:

Pick

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
14. Mechanical Toolbar
Pipe Shell Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
13. Generate a report by picking the “Show Report” icon:
Pick

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
• Select “General Report” , then [OK]

10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1
INTRODUCTION TO
INTRODUCTION TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0 Part 1
10.0 -- Part 1
Workshop Supplement
14. Mechanical Toolbar
Pipe Shell
14. Mechanical Toolbar
Pipe Shell Workshop Supplement

INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION TO
14. Save the database and exit the ANSYS Mechanical Toolbar:
– Utility Menu > File > Save as Jobname.db
– Utility Menu > File > Exit ...

TO ANSYS
ANSYS 10.0
10.0 -- Part
Part 1
1

You might also like